Download Pioneer DVR-560HX-S
Transcript
00 Cover_back_560HX_WV.fm 1 ページ 2008年3月6日 木曜日 午前10時54分 HDD/DVD Recorder Operating Instructions DVR-560HX-K DVR-560HX-S HDD/DVD Recorder http://www.pioneer.co.uk http://www.pioneer.eu Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright © 2008 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. Operating Instructions PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. Discover the benefits of registering your product online at http://www.pioneer.co.uk (or http://www.pioneer.eu) 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 Printed in UK K002_B_En <VRB1486-A> DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 2 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. IMPORTANT CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION: TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. D3-4-2-1-1_En-A &$(# !'&!"'*'%#%"""#%)!'% "%&"-%"!"'#!,"!'!% *'$(!%'&$(# !'&(&)&"% "*%#"'"%+#"&''"%##!&#&!%! ! "% "&'(% +$!)$)+ !!%$,'(*%%!- '( $' #)$$*#)'-$'' $#(*'))) %$,'(*%%!-+$!)$)',') (*# ) , !!*(")()'&* '+$!) # $',' ))#$#)''%#! CAUTION CAUTION ATTENTION ADVARSEL VARNING VORSICHT PRECAUCIÓN VARO! VRW2262 - A CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN, AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM. RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT. ÉVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU. KLASSE 3B SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING. UNDGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING. KLASS 3B SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÄTTA DIG FÖR STRÅLEN. BEI GEÖFFNETER ABDECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG DER KLASSE 3B IM GERÄTEINNEREN VORHANDEN. NICHT DEM LASERSTRAHL AUSSETZEN! CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACIÓN LÁSER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICIÓN A LOS RAYOS LÁSER. AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN. D3-4-2-1-8_B_En "! $!!$!!# !# "#%)!'%+%"!"'#!*! &"(%&&(&'!"!' ! $(# !' %!# ! $ # !# % ! ! # ! "%% " ! # & #%% ! ! ! %!!# ! " %!! %%!#! %!! ! % "%% !" " " ! DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 3 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Operating Environment #$&!!($"! !&& #$&'$!' &* +&" ++&" +%%&! ""!(!&%!"&" "!"&!%&&%'!&!#""$*(!&&$"$! "&"!%)#"%&"' &*"$$&%'!&"$ D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En %&$"!$&& $!)%)./''%)#/$%.0)%/(&!.0-!/*'!1!.+! -*0) /$!0)%/"*-1!)/%'/%*)/*%(+-*1!$!/ - %/%*)/'!./(//*+(/-!-) (/!$.% ! CAUTION $!! "!$! !& "!$!"!! !$ # ! ! #!"!&"$!""! !"!!! "!$$ "!"! ! !!! $ &""! "!! !#' !$ " ""! "!!$!"" ! D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En %$#! '*/.) *+!)%)#.%)/$!%)!/-!+-*1% ! "*- 1!)/%'/%*)/*!).0-!-!'%'!*+!-/%*)*"/$! +-* 0/) /*+-*/!/%/"-*(*1!-$!/%)#* +-!1!)/"%-!$4- /$!*+!)%)#..$*0' )!1!-! '*&! *-*1!-! 2%/$%/!(..0$.)!2.++!-. /'!'*/$.0-/%).*-3*+!-/%)#/$! ) !,0%+(!)/*)/$%&-+!/*-! POWER-CORD CAUTION $ " ! " $ $$ ! ! $! $! "" #" ! !$%!"!""!! "%!"!#!"!$ $%" $! ! "" !"!! !!"! "!"!!$! #!!!!$!! $ ""! "!!!% !%! !$ " #%"! !$$%"! %" ! "!& #!%"! S002_En Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel. IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362. Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse. If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer. If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket. If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician. IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: Blue : Neutral Brown : Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows ; The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse. D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 4 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 01 Contents 01 Before you start What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Putting the batteries in the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using the remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Disc/content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . 12 Symbols used in this manual . . . . . . . . . 13 02 Connections Rear panel connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Connecting a TV antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Using other types of audio/video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Connecting an external decoder box (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Connecting an external decoder box (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . 23 Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 39 39 41 50 06 Using the digital electronic programme guide The Digital EPG system . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Digital EPG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting timer programmes . . . . . . . . . . . Other useful EPG functions . . . . . . . . . . 53 54 54 59 07 Recording Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 04 Getting started 08 Playback Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . 32 For users receiving digital broadcast services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 En The GUIDE Plus+® system . . . . . . . . . . Using the GUIDE Plus+® system . . . . . Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GUIDE Plus+® FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About HDD recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recorded audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the picture quality/ recording time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording from an external component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initializing recordable DVD discs . . . . . . DVD-RW Auto Initialize. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03 Controls and displays 4 05 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanning discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 61 61 62 62 65 66 67 69 71 71 72 73 74 75 75 79 80 80 81 81 DVR560HX_WV_ENTOC.fm 5 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後8時11分 Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . 83 Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks. . . 83 Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 09 Playing and recording from a DV/HDD camcorder Playing from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . . . 86 Recording from a DV camcorder . . . . . . . 86 About DV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Copying from an HDD camcorder . . . . . . 89 10 Editing Editing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 The Disc Navigator screen. . . . . . . . . . . . 91 11 Copying and backup Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 One Touch Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Using Copy Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Using disc backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 12 Playing and copying DivX files (PC VIDEO) Playing DivX files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Copying DivX files to the HDD . . . . . . . . 109 Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 13 Playing and copying music (Jukebox) Copying music to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . 111 Playing music from the Jukebox . . . . . . 113 Copying albums/tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Editing the HDD Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . 116 14 Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer) Locating JPEG picture files . . . . . . . . . . 117 Playing a slideshow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Creating photo movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Importing files to the HDD . . . . . . . . . . 120 Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW . . . . . . . . 121 Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Editing files on the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Printing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 15 Copying files from a PC (Connect PC) Connecting the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Copying WMA/MP3 files. . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Copying JPEG and DivX files . . . . . . . . 127 16 The Disc Setup menu Basic settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialize HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 129 129 129 130 17 The Video Adjust menu Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 18 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . 134 19 Additional information Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Minimum copying times. . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 On-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Front panel displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Country/Area code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . 165 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Moving the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 5 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 01 6 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Before you start Chapter 1 Before you start What’s in the box Please confirm that the following accessories are in the box when you open it; • • • • • • • • Remote control AA/R6P dry cell batteries x 2 Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) G-LINK™ cable RF antenna cable x 2 Power cable These operating instructions Warranty card Putting the batteries in the remote control • Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery compartment following the indications (,) inside the compartment. Important Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following: 6 En • Don’t mix new and old batteries together. • Don’t use different kinds of batteries together — although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages. • Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment. • Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to be used for a month or more. • When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or area. WARNING Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries. D3-4-2-3-3_En Using the remote control Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control: • Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit. • Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s remote sensor. • Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit. • Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote. • When the batteries run down or you change the batteries, the remote control mode is reset to Recorder 1. See Remote Control Mode on page 145. • Use within the operating range in front of the remote control sensor on the front panel, as shown. 7m DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 7 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Before you start • You can control this recorder using the remote sensor of another Pioneer component via the CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel connections on page 14 for more information. Disc/content format playback compatibility 01 The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders’ limited compatibility with DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs. Model DVR-7000 DVR-3100 DVR-5100H Playable Recordable Yes*1,2,3 No Yes*1 No *1 Compatible media • DVD-RW ver. 1.1 / 1x / 1x to 2x, ver. 1.2 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 6x • DVD-R ver. 2.0 / 1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x, ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x • DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x • DVD+R 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x • DVD-RAM ver. 2.0 / 2x, ver. 2.1 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x, ver. 2.2 / 2x / 2x to 3x / 2x to 5x • DVD-R DL ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x / 2x to 8x • DVD+R DL 2.4x / 2.4x to 8x Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW ver 1.2 discs and/or corrupt the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we recommend using ver.1.1 discs. Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs may not play. *2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback. *3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play. Readable file system This recorder can play DVDs recorded under the following file systems1: ISO 9660*, UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.00, UDF 2.01. * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder. Note 1 • Depending on the recording technique used, even files recorded in compatible file systems may not play correctly. • MP3/WMA/DivX files can be played back when recorded onto a DVD that contains no video titles and uses the UDF 1.02, UDF 1.50, UDF 2.01 or ISO 9660 file systems. 7 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 01 8 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Before you start HDD/DVD Recording and playback compatibility This recorder can play and record all widely-used DVD disc types, and additionally provides HDD functionality. The table below shows some specific compatibility differences between the different disc types. HDD Marks used in this manual HDD DVD-R DVD (VR) DVD-RW DVD (Video) *1 DVD (VR) DVD (Video) *1 *2 DVD+R DVD +RW DVD -RAM DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM *13, 16 Logos Re-recordable/ Erasable *3 *3 *3 *14 Editing of recorded programmes *4 *4 *4 *4 Recording of Copyonce protected material *12 Playback in other players/recorders n/a *5 Chase play 16:9 and 4:3 programme recording Bilingual broadcast *10, 11 recording of both audio channels *12 *6 *6, 15 *8 *9 *11 *11 *11 *1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 129). *2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording (page 129). *3 Erasable, but free space does not increase. *4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist editing. *5 Must be compatible with DVD-R (VR) playback. *6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in some units) (page 72). *7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW (VR) playback. *8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback. *9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback. *10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (page 142). En *6 Notes to table 8 *7 *12 *11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM. *12 CPRM-compatible discs only. *13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only Panasonic and Maxell discs have been tested to work reliably with this recorder. Discs from other makers may become unusable when recorded or edited. *14 Erasing a title does not increase the available recording time, nor increase the number of recordable titles left. *15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback. *16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized before it can be recorded (page 129). In this case, initialization may take over one hour. is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 9 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Before you start Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD+R DL (Double-Layer) discs contain two recordable layers on a single side, giving about 1.8 times the recording capacity of a conventional single-layer disc. This unit can record to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs. • If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video mode) or DVD+R DL discs recorded on this unit on other DVD recorders/players, you must finalize them. (Note that some DVD recorders/players may not play even finalized DL discs.) • This logo indicates that the disc is a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc: 01 The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio content will not play. For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer. Other disc compatibility In addition to DVD, this recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the logos on the disc and/or disc packaging shown below. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD (and DVD), may be in an unplayable format — see below for further compatibility information. Audio CD Correct operation has been confirmed for DL discs: • DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 4x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim) • DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 8x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim) That’s JVC • DVD+R DL 2.4x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim) RICOH • DVD+R DL 2.4x to 8x Mitsubishi Kagaku Media (Verbatim) RICOH About DualDisc playback A DualDisc is a new two -sided disc, one side of which contains DVD content – video, audio, etc. – while the other side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio material. The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD audio specification and therefore may not play. It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the opposite side to that being played will be scratched. Scratched discs may not be playable. Video CD CD-R CD-RW Super Video CD (Super VCD) CD-R/-RW compatibility This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs. • Readable formats: CD audio, Video CD/ Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX files * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder. • Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD audio and Video CD/Super VCD) • Unfinalized disc playback: CD audio only Compressed audio compatibility • Compatible media: DVD-ROM, DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM, CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, USB • Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA) 9 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 01 10 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Before you start • Sampling rates (MP3/WMA): 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz • Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended) • Variable bit-rate (VBR) WMA/MP3 playback: Yes1 • WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec 8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR) • DRM (Digital Rights Management)2 file playback: No • File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do not use for other file types) • File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders/999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that this on the disc then more can be reloaded) WMA (Windows Media™ Audio) content This recorder can playback Windows Media Audio content. WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. Windows Media is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc. 10 En DivX video compatibility DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the DivX® video codec from DivX, Inc. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are called “Titles”. When naming files/titles on a disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetical order. • Official DivX® Certified product. • Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX® media files. • File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the recorder to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are recognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefore may not be playable on this recorder. • File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999 files. DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. DivX® VOD content DivX In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this recorder, you first need to register the recorder with your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider. Note 1 The elapsed playing time may not be displayed properly. 2 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 11 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Before you start Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is displayed. If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your recorder and play the content as often as you like, and no message will be displayed. 01 PC-created disc compatibility Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible with this recorder. Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information. Dolby Digital Important • DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. • If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not authorized for this recorder, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the content will not play. • Resetting the recorder (as described in Resetting the recorder on page 167) will not cause you to lose your registration code. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DTS JPEG file compatibility • Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* still image files *File format used by digital still cameras • Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0 • Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels • Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels • Progressive JPEG compatible: No • File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jif, .jfif (must be used for the recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use for other file types) • File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders/999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that this on the disc then more can be reloaded) Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. DVB The Digital Video Broadcasting Project, or DVB for short, is a set of open standards for digital broadcasting, covering terrestrial, cable and satellite broadcasts. 11 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 01 12 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Before you start Based around the MPEG-2 coding system, these open standards ensure that compliant systems are able to work together, independent of manufacturer. DVB is extremely flexible, being able to deliver virtually any kind of digital content to the home, including High Definition and Standard Definition TV, broadband multimedia content and interactive services. DVB is a registered trademark of the DVB Project. About the internal hard disk drive The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of equipment. When used without the proper care or in the wrong conditions, it is possible that recorded contents may be damaged or lost entirely, in some cases making even normal playback or recording impossible. Please understand that in the event of repair or replacement of the HDD or related components, all your HDD recordings will be lost. Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to protect against possible HDD failure. The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up your important recordings onto DVD discs in order to protect against accidental loss. Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from HDD failure. 12 En • Do not move the recorder while it is on (this includes during EPG download when the front panel display shows EPG). • Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface. • Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan. • Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid places, or in places that may be subject to sudden changes in temperature. Sudden changes in temperature can cause condensation to form inside the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure. • While the recorder is switched on (including during EPG download when the front panel display shows EPG), do not unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity off from the breaker switch. • Do not move the recorder immediately after switching it off. If you need to move the recorder, please follow the steps below: 1 After the message POWER OFF is shown on the front panel display, wait at least two minutes. 2 Unplug from the wall socket. 3 Move the recorder. • If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be lost. • The HDD is very delicate. If used over time in an improper manner or in an unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD will fail. Signs of problems include playback unexpectedly freezing and noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture. However, sometimes there will be no warning signs of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded material will be possible. In this case it will be necessary to replace the HDD unit. Optimizing HDD performance As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the recorder’s performance. Before this happens, the recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD (which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see Optimize HDD on page 129). DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 13 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Before you start 01 Symbols used in this manual The following icons are provided to help you quickly identify which instructions you need for which kind of disc. HDD HDD DVD Any type of DVD disc (recordable or playback only), finalized or not. DVD-Video Commercially produced DVD, finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW. DVD (Video) Video mode DVD-R/-RW (unfinalized) DVD (VR) VR mode DVD-R/-RW DVD+R DVD+R DVD+RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM DVD-RAM CD Audio CD Video CD Video CD Super VCD Super VCD WMA/MP3 WMA or MP3 files DivX DivX files ALL All of the above 13 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 02 14 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Connections Chapter 2 Connections Rear panel connections 1 2 ANTENNA R IN AUDIO L 3 4 5 HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT VIDEO COAXIAL S-VIDEO INPUT 3 AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) G-LINK IN IN 5 V AC IN 30 mA OUT OUT PB Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUTPUT 6 7 AV 1 (RGB) – TV 8 CONTROL 9 10 1 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to your TV. 2 INPUT 3 Stereo analog audio, video and S-Video inputs for connection to a VCR or other source component. 3 AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART connector. The input accepts video, S-Video and RGB. See AV2/L1 In on page 138 for how to set this up. 4 HDMI OUT HDMI output for high quality digital audio and video. 5 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) Coaxial digital audio jack for connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/DTS/ MPEG decoder or other equipment with a digital input. 6 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or monitor with a component video input. 14 En ANTENNA(DIGITAL) 11 12 7 OUTPUT Stereo analog audio, video and S-Video outputs for connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver. 8 AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART connector. The video output is switchable between video, S-Video and RGB. See AV1 Out on page 138 for how to set this up. 9 G-LINK™ Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable to enable GUIDE Plus+® to control an external satellite receiver, etc. 10 CONTROL IN Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT terminal and bearing the Pioneer mark. Connect the CONTROL OUT of the other component to the CONTROL IN of this recorder using a miniplug cord. 11 ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN/OUT Connect your DTV antenna to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) OUT jack for connection to your TV. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 15 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Connections 02 12 AC IN – Power inlet Connect to a power outlet using the supplied power cable after making all other connections. connect the other supplied RF antenna cable to connect an antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connector. Lastly, connect the recorder to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT connector. Front panel connections Antenna wall outlet or indoor antenna Antenna wall outlet On the front panel there is a flip-down cover that hides more connections. Left side: ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN ANTENNA IN (RF IN) DV IN USB ANTENNA R IN AUDIO L VIDEO COAXIAL S-VIDEO INPUT 3 AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) HDMI OUT G-LINK IN IN 5 V DIGITAL OUT AC IN 30 mA OUT OUT PB Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 1 2 To antenna input 2 USB port (Type A) USB port for connecting an HDD camcorder, digital camera, keyboard or other USB device. 3 USB port (Type B) USB port for connecting a PictBridgecompatible printer or PC. Right side: S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) R ANTENNA(DIGITAL) ANTENNA OUT 3 1 DV IN A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a DV camcorder. INPUT 2 CONTROL AV 1 (RGB) – TV OUTPUT AUDIO 4 4 INPUT 2 Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and S-Video), especially suitable for camcorders, game consoles, portable audio, etc. Connecting a TV antenna TV Important • If there is only one antenna outlet on your wall, use a divider. • Do not connect a component that can receive analog signals to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) OUT. If your area is not yet served with terrestrial digital services, connect your antenna’s output to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connector using one of the supplied RF antenna cables. Next, connect the recorder to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT connector. Antenna wall outlet ANTENNA IN (RF IN) ANTENNA R IN AUDIO L VIDEO COAXIAL S-VIDEO INPUT 3 AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) HDMI OUT G-LINK IN IN 5 V DIGITAL OUT AC IN 30 mA OUT OUT PB Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners for terrestrial digital and terrestrial analog TV broadcasts. If you are ready to receive digital broadcasts now, use one of the supplied RF antenna cables connect an antenna (either an antenna wall outlet or indoor antenna) to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN connector. Next, OUTPUT AV 1 (RGB) – TV CONTROL ANTENNA(DIGITAL) ANTENNA OUT To antenna input TV 15 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 02 16 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Connections We strongly recommend using an outdoor antenna for better broadcast picture quality. If, however, you want to use an indoor antenna, use one with a signal amplifier rated at 5 V, 30 mA and set Aerial Power to On in the Initial Setup menu (see page 136). Easy connections The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programmes, and play discs. Other types of connections are explained starting on the following page. 1 Antenna/cable TV wall outlet To antenna input From antenna output From SCART AV connector VCR To recorder's antenna input 3 AV2 (INPUT 1/ DECODER) ANTENNA R IN AUDIO L VIDEO COAXIAL S-VIDEO INPUT 3 AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) HDMI OUT G-LINK IN IN 5 V AC IN DIGITAL OUT 30 mA OUT OUT PB Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AV 1 (RGB) – TV OUTPUT CONTROL ANTENNA(DIGITAL) AV1 (RGB) - TV 2 Important • These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, and you want to use the supplied audio/video cable, see Using the supplied audio/video cable below. • The AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-Video or RGB video, plus stereo analog audio. The AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-Video and RGB video input, as well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out and AV2/L1 In on page 138 for how to setup these options. • Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet. To SCART AV connector TV 1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV. See Connecting a TV antenna on page 15 for details. • If you want to incorporate a VCR in your setup, connect it before the recorder (i.e., between the antenna wall outlet and the antenna input on the recorder). 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the SCART AV connector on your TV. 3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your VCR. Tip • This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows you to record a TV programme from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing on your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is in standby, Power Save must be set to Off — see Power Save on page 134). 16 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 17 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Connections 02 Using other types of audio/ video output If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output jacks, as well as an S-Video and component video output. Using the S-Video or component video output To component video input 1 TV 2 Using the supplied audio/video cable To video input To audio input S-VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT ANTENNA R IN AUDIO L VIDEO COAXIAL S-VIDEO INPUT 3 AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) HDMI OUT G-LINK IN IN 5 V DIGITAL OUT AC IN 30 mA OUT OUT PB Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT To audio input OUTPUT AV 1 (RGB) – TV CONTROL ANTENNA(DIGITAL) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT To video input TV AUDIO OUTPUT 2 ANTENNA R IN VIDEO OUTPUT AUDIO L VIDEO 1 COAXIAL S-VIDEO INPUT 3 AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) HDMI OUT G-LINK IN IN 5 V DIGITAL OUT AC IN 30 mA OUT OUT PB Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUTPUT AV 1 (RGB) – TV CONTROL ANTENNA(DIGITAL) 1 Connect the S-Video or component video output to a similar input on your TV. For an S-Video connection, use an S-Video cable (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUTPUT jack to an S-Video input on your TV. 1 Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input on your TV. Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/ video cable for the video connection. For a component video connection, use a component video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to a component video input on your TV. 2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the corresponding audio inputs on your TV. Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/video cable for the audio connection. Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. See also Component Video Out on page 137 for how to set up the component video output for use with a progressive scancompatible TV. 2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the corresponding audio inputs on your TV. You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound. 17 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 02 18 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Connections Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver If you have a cable box or satellite receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.1 If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions on the next page. 1 From antenna output Cable/Satellite receiver AV2 (INPUT 1/ DECODER) ANTENNA R IN AUDIO L 4 VIDEO COAXIAL S-VIDEO INPUT 3 AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) HDMI OUT G-LINK IN IN 5 V AC IN DIGITAL OUT 30 mA OUT OUT PB Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AV 1 (RGB) – TV OUTPUT CONTROL ANTENNA(DIGITAL) AV1 (RGB) - TV 2 To SCART AV connector Important • Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or other component. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver. • When using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make a timer recording from an external receiver, make sure that the external receiver is switched on. From SCART AV connector 3 To recorder's antenna input Using the setup on this page you can: • Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver. • Change channels and set timer recordings on the external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+® system (via the G-LINK™ cable, and after setting up). Satellite dish/ antenna/cable TV wall outlet To antenna input TV 1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown. See Connecting a TV antenna on page 15 for more on RF antenna connections, including from this recorder to your TV. 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV. This enables you to watch discs. 3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your cable box/satellite receiver. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. 4 Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™ jack. This enables you to control the tuner in the external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+® system. 18 En Note 1 The diagram shows SCART video connections, but you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video connections. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 19 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Connections 02 Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK™ cable so that the IR receiver on your cable/satellite receiver will pick up the control signals (see diagram). • It is not possible to watch one TV programme and record another using this setup. Antenna/cable TV wall outlet S-VIDEO INPUT 3 AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) G-LINK OUTPUT AV 1 (RGB) – TV IN CONTROL G-LINK cable See the manual that came with your cable/ satellite receiver if you’re not sure where the IR receiver is on the front panel. Alternatively, experiment with the remote control, operating it from very close range until you find the place where the receiver responds. SCART AV connection 2 1 To antenna input O From SCART AV connector Decoder VCR/Satellite receiver/Cable box 3 AV2 (INPUT 1/ DECODER) ANTENNA R IN AUDIO L VIDEO COAXIAL S-VIDEO INPUT 3 AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) HDMI OUT G-LINK IN 5 V IN AC IN DIGITAL OUT 30 mA OUT OUT PB Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AV 1 (RGB) – TV OUTPUT CONTROL ANTENNA(DIGITAL) AV1 (RGB) - TV 4 Tip • This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows you to record a TV programme from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing on your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is in standby, Power Save must be set to Off — see Power Save on page 134). Connecting an external decoder box (1) If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this page. See above for how to connect the G-LINK™ cable. Important • Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder. • Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off (in standby). • For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/ cable box must also be switched on during recording. To SCART AV connector TV 1 Connect the cable from the antenna/ cable TV outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box. 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your decoder to your VCR/ satellite receiver/cable box. See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed instructions. 3 Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector on this recorder. 4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector to your TV. 19 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 02 20 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Connections Connecting an external decoder box (2) If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.1 Using the setup on this page you can: • Record scrambled channels received using the recorder’s built-in analog TV tuner. Important • Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/ receiver. Decoder 3 AUDIO L From SCART AV connector VIDEO COAXIAL S-VIDEO INPUT 3 AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) HDMI OUT G-LINK IN IN 5 V AC IN DIGITAL OUT 3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your decoder box. This enables you to record scrambled TV channels. Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amplifier/receiver using the digital coaxial output. In addition to a digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection for compatibility with all discs and sources. AV2 (INPUT 1/ DECODER) ANTENNA R IN 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1 (RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV. This enables you to watch discs. 30 mA OUT You’ll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the ordinary video output (as shown here), or the S-Video output. OUT PB Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AV 1 (RGB) – TV OUTPUT CONTROL ANTENNA(DIGITAL) Important AV1 (RGB) - TV 2 To SCART AV connector TV 1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV. See Connecting a TV antenna on page 15 for details. 20 En • Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amplifier/receiver properly (see Audio Out on page 139). • When watching D.TV only linear PCM audio is output from the coaxial digital out jack. • Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’ your VCR using A/V cables. Always connect it directly to your TV. Note 1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu: • Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 138). • From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 137). DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 21 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Connections ANTENNA R IN AUDIO L 02 Connecting using HDMI VIDEO COAXIAL S-VIDEO INPUT 3 AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) HDMI OUT G-LINK IN IN 5 V AC IN DIGITAL OUT 30 mA OUT OUT PB Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT AV 1 (RGB) – TV OUTPUT CONTROL AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT 3 To audio/ video input AV amp/ receiver ANTENNA(DIGITAL) DIGITAL AUDIO OUT To digital input 2 From video output 4 To video input If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped1 monitor or display2, you can connect it to this recorder using an HDMI cable3 (not supplied). The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio. 1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT connector on this recorder to an HDMI connector on an HDMI-compatible display. HDMI To HDMI IN input TV 1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV. See Connecting a TV antenna on page 15 for details. This enables you to watch and record TV channels. HDMI-compatible display HDMI OUT ANTENNA R IN AUDIO L VIDEO COAXIAL S-VIDEO INPUT 3 AV 2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) HDMI OUT G-LINK 2 Connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (COAXIAL) jack on this recorder to a coaxial digital input on your AV amplifier/receiver. This enables you to listen to multichannel surround sound. 3 Connect the analog AUDIO OUTPUT and VIDEO OUTPUT jacks on this recorder to an analog audio and video input on your AV amplifier/receiver. 4 Connect the AV amplifier/receiver’s video output to a video input on your TV. IN IN 5 V DIGITAL OUT AC IN 30 mA OUT OUT PB Y PR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OUTPUT AV 1 (RGB) – TV CONTROL ANTENNA(DIGITAL) • The arrow on the cable connector body should be face down for correct alignment with the connector on the recorder. When connected to an HDMI component or HDCP-compatible DVI component, the HDMI indicator lights. HDMI setup is generally automatic. There are however settings you can change if you need to. See HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected) on page 144 for more information. Note that the HDMI settings remain in effect until you Note 1 Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. 2 The pixel resolution of this recorder’s HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p). If your display is not compatible with these resolutions the picture may not be correctly reproduced. 3 The 1080p video may not be displayed correctly if the High Speed HDMI cable is not used. 21 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 02 22 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Connections change them, or connect a new HDMI component. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. Important • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDMI connection, however, does not support audio. Consult your local audio dealer for more information. • The HDMI connection is compatible with 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/ 20 bit/24 bit 2-channel linear PCM signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG audio bitstream. • If your connected component is only compatible with Linear PCM, the signal is output as Linear PCM (DTS audio is not output). • If you have connected to a Pioneer Flat Screen TV, please select the HDMI setup on the display (refer to the supplied manual for more on this). About HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays. 22 En HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel surroundsound audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to five gigabits per second (Dual Link), one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs. HDMI Control By connecting this unit to an HDMI Controlcompatible Pioneer Flat Screen TV, AV system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.) or HD AV converter with an HDMI cable, you can control this unit from the remote control of a connected Flat Screen TV, as well as have the connected Flat Screen TV automatically change inputs in response to this unit starting playback. Refer to the operating instructions for your Flat Screen TV, AV system or HD AV converter for more information about which operations can be carried out by connecting via HDMI cable. Auto-select function You can have a connected Flat Screen TV, AV system or HD AV converter automatically change inputs when playback begins on this unit (including when you have a GUI (such as Disc Navigator) set to display on this unit). Certain connected Flat Screen TVs may have their power turned from off to on when using this function. Simultaneous power function You can have this unit turn on automatically when the power for a connected Flat Screen TV is turned on. To have this unit’s power turned off when a connected Flat Screen TV is turned off, you must change the simultaneous power function of your Flat Screen TV. Unified language function By receiving language information from a connected Flat Screen TV, you can have this unit’s language settings automatically change to those of the Flat Screen TV (language information can be received only when no media is being played back and no recordings are taking place, or when you choose not to display this unit’s GUI displays). DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 23 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Connections Important • The KURO LINK function name used on the web and in catalogues is referred to as HDMI Control in the operating instructions and on the product. • Depending on the type of Flat Screen TV, some HDMI input terminals do not support the HDMI Control function. For details, see the operating instructions supplied with your Flat Screen TV. • To use the following functions, set this unit’s HDMI Control to Off (page 145). – The timer recording to use VPS/PDC (page 69). – When you want this unit to automatically switch off upon completion of timer recording. (When HDMI Control is set to On, this unit does not automatically switch off if your Flat Screen TV is switched on upon completion of timer recording.) – When using the Video Control function of an external component. – Child lock settings (page 70). – When you connect a SCART cable and an HDMI cable to the same Flat Screen TV simultaneously. • HDMI Control may not operate properly if you do not use a High Speed HDMI cable. • Controls may not function properly in certain situations, such as immediately after you have connect an HDMI cable, turn this unit’s power off or remove the power cable for this unit or the connected component. If you experience any problems, set HDMI Control to On for all connected units, and then display the pictures stored on this unit on your Flat Screen TV to improve the situations. • We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI control-compatible components other than those made by Pioneer. 02 Connecting other AV sources Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder OPEN/CLOSE HDD/DVD HDD STANDBY/ON DV IN DVD A.TV D.TV COMMON INTERFACE USB AUDIO/VIDEO OUTPUT (Rear panel) HDMI INPUT 2 CH STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY INPUT SELECT A.TV/D.TV S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO REC AUDIO/VIDEO INPUT (Front panel) 2 1 To audio/ video input Analog camcorder From audio/ video output VCR 1 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this recorder. This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR or camcorder. • You can use standard video or S-Video cables for the video connection. • Alternatively, you can use the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector for audio/video input and output with just one SCART cable. 2 Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder. This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or camcorder. • You can use standard video or S-Video cables for the video connection. • The front panel connections make convenient connections for a camcorder input. • When connecting an external AV source that only supports monaural sound, only insert the left (white) audio jack to this device. Doing so will allow the same sound track to be recorded to both channels. You must connect to the INPUT 2 jack on the front panel. 23 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 02 24 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Connections Connecting a DV camcorder Important You can connect a DV camcorder or DVD recorder with DV output to the front panel DV IN jack. Important • This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is not compatible with digital satellite receivers or D-VHS video decks. OPEN/CLOSE HDD/DVD HDD STANDBY/ON DV IN DVD A.TV D.TV COMMON INTERFACE USB HDMI INPUT 2 CH STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY INPUT SELECT A.TV/D.TV S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO REC DV IN From DV output Connecting an HDD camcorder DV camcorder • Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV jack of your DV camcorder to the front panel DV IN jack of this recorder. Connecting a USB device Using the USB ports on the front of the recorder you can connect USB devices such as HDD camcorders, digital cameras, printers, keyboards and PCs. Please also see the instructions that came with the device you want to connect before using. DV IN USB DVD A.TV USB (Type A) USB Digital Camera Keyboard 24 En D.TV COMMON INTERFACE HDMI INPUT 2 CH HDD camcorder On the recorder’s HDD, video files can only be copied with the signal format shown below. • Video recording format: MPEG-2 (PS) • Image resolution: 720 x 480 (576), 704 x 480 (576), 352 x 480 (576), 352 x 240 (288) • Audio recording format: Dolby Digital • Use a USB cable (supplied with an HDD camcorder) to connect the USB port of your HDD camcorder to the front panel USB port of this recorder. OPEN/CLOSE HDD/DVD HDD STANDBY/ON • The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this recorder may not recognize it. • Some USB devices may not work with this recorder. • When connecting a PC to this unit, make sure the power is turned off on both the PC and this unit when you connect them via USB. • We recommend connecting USB devices when this recorder is switched off (in standby). • We recommend USB cables 2 meters in length or shorter. STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY INPUT SELECT A.TV/D.TV S-VIDEO VIDEO L(MONO) R AUDIO REC USB (Type B) HDD camcorder with which operation is guaranteed (According to our survey) • SONY DCR-SR300, DCR-SR62, DCR-SR300E, DCR-SR52E USB PictBridge-compatible Printer PC DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 25 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Connections JPEG file storage devices • Digital still camera • Memory card reader (any type of memory card) • USB memory • PC (Use Connect PC function) The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be used to transfer up to a maximum of 4000 files. WMA/MP3 file storage devices • Memory card reader (any type of memory card) • USB memory • PC (Use Connect PC function) Note that although multi-slot card readers can be used, the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted. To read another card, remove all the cards and insert the card to be read again. Using a USB hub • Use a hub compatible with USB 1.1 and/ or 2.0. • Use an independently powered hub (bus powered hubs may not work reliably). • In the event of unreliable operation with the hub, we recommend plugging the device directly into the recorder’s USB port. • Operation may become unreliable if too many devices are connected to the hub. In this case, try unplugging some devices. • If the power delivered through a hub is insufficient for the devices connected, communication can become unreliable. In this case, disconnect one or more devices then perform a USB restart. (See Restart USB Device on page 146.) 02 Using a PC • Note that you can connect a PC to this device via USB to copy WMA/MP3, JPEG and DivX files. For more information, see Copying files from a PC (Connect PC) on page 125. To use Connect PC with this device, your PC must run either the Windows XP Home Edition (SP2), Windows XP Professional (SP2) or Windows Vista Home Premium operating system and be able to run Windows Media Player 11. Even if your PC can run Windows Media Player 11, we cannot guarantee that it will function properly with this device. For more details see the ‘Help’ section of Windows Media Player 11. Plugging in After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder. • Use the supplied power cable to connect this recorder to a power outlet. Using a USB printer • Use a PictBridge-compatible printer. Using a USB keyboard • Do not use a PS/2 keyboard connected using a PS/2-USB adapter. 25 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 26 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Controls and displays 03 Chapter 3 Controls and displays Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 STANDBY/ON DV IN DVD USB A.TV 12 2 HDD/DVD Press to switch between HDD and DVD for recording and playback. 3 DVD indicator Lights when the DVD drive is selected. 4 Disc tray 5 PC VIDEO(page 108) Press to play DivX files you have not yet viewed. 6 MUSIC(page 114) Press to play music files in random order. 7 PHOTO(page 119) Press to play JPEG files in random order. 8 OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 26 En 10 A.TV indicator Lights when analog TV is selected. HDMI INPUT 2 13 1 HDD indicator Lights when the hard disk (HDD) is selected. 9 D.TV COMMON INTERFACE CH 11 9 OPEN/CLOSE HDD/DVD HDD 8 STOP REC ONE TOUCH COPY INPUT SELECT A.TV/D.TV S-VIDEO 14 VIDEO L(MONO) 12 R REC AUDIO 15 10 Front panel display and IR remote sensor See Display on page 28 for details. 11 STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 12 Front panel inputs See Front panel connections on page 15 for more information on these. 13 COMMON INTERFACE slot Slot for CA module and smart card used to decode scrambled D.TV channels. See Common Interface on page 27. 14 Press to start or restart playback. Press to stop playback. F STOP REC Press to stop recording. ONE TOUCH COPY D.TV indicator Lights when digital TV is selected. Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD. HDMI indicator Lights when this recorder is connected to HDMI (HDCP) compatible component. CH +/– Use to change channels, skip chapters/ tracks, etc. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 27 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Controls and displays INPUT SELECT Press to change the input used for recording. A.TV/D.TV Switches between analog TV antenna input and digital TV antenna input. The A.TV and D.TV indicators show which is selected. 15 REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in 30 minute blocks. 03 Common Interface To receive scrambled D.TV channels you will need a CA module and smart card provided by your service provider. Different CA modules support different encryption systems. This recorder is designed to work with modules that support the DVB standard. Contact your service provider to obtain the right kind of CA module. Note that neither CA modules nor smart cards are supplied or sold by Pioneer. Inserting a CA module The Common Interface card slot is located on the front panel of the recorder. • Insert the CA module into the card slot as far as it will go. The Common Interface card slot accepts Type I and Type II PC Cards (PCMCIA cards). 27 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 28 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Controls and displays 03 Display 1 2 3 4 L R 8 7 P 6 1 Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused. 5 Recording quality indicators (page 65) XP Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (high quality). 2 Lights when copying. SP Lights when the recording mode is set to SP (standard play). 3 Lights during recording; blinks when recording is paused. 4 5 LP/SLP Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long play) or SLP (super-long play). (page 69) Lights when a timer recording has been set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has been set to record to the HDD but the HDD is not recordable.) EP/SEP Lights when the recording mode is set to EP (extended play) or SEP (superextended play). NTSC Lights when the video output signal format is NTSC. MN Lights when the recording mode is set to MN (manual recording level) mode. (page 139) Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded. 6 Character display 7 R/RW Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW disc is loaded. (page 137) Lights when the component video output is set to progressive scan. 8 VPS/PDC (page 69) Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording. PL (page 91) Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is in Play List mode. 2 3 (page 145) Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed, the remote control mode is 1). V Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded. 28 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 29 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Controls and displays 03 Remote control STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE 1 16 While watching D.TV, press to change the D.TV subtitles. PAUSE LIVE TV TV CONTROL 2 SUBTITLE (page 83) Press to display/change the subtitles included in multilingual DVD-Video discs. 17 INPUT SELECT CH VOL TV/DVD AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE DISPLAY 18 ANGLE (page 84) Press to switch camera angles on discs with multi-angle scenes. 3 ABC 4 DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ INPUT SELECT A.TV/D.TV CHANNEL HDD DVD PC VIDEO MUSIC DISPLAY (page 85) Displays/changes the on-screen information displays. + 5 19 6 7 PHOTO HOME MEDIA GALLERY DISC NAVIGATOR HELP 8 9 20 TOP MENU 4 Number buttons, CLEAR, + Use the number buttons for track/chapter/ title selection; channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on. Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again. 5 HOME MENU RETURN 10 21 INPUT SELECT (page 71) Press to change the input to use for recording. EXIT A.TV/D.TV Press to switch between analog TV antenna input and digital TV antenna input. The A.TV and D.TV indicators on the front panel show which is selected. 11 GUIDE INFO TEXT PREV PAUSE STOP NEXT TIMER REC MENU CM BACK CM SKIP REC STOP REC REC MODE ONE TOUCH COPY 12 PLAY 13 14 15 6 HDD (pages 66, 75) Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording and playback. DVD (pages 66, 75) Press to select DVD for recording and playback. 1 STANDBY/ON Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. 2 TV CONTROL buttons (page 149) After setting up, use these controls to control your TV. 3 AUDIO (pages 64, 83, 84) Press to change the audio language or channel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.) 7 HOME MEDIA GALLERY Files stored on the HDD can easily be played using these buttons. PC VIDEO (page 108) Press to play DivX files you have not yet viewed. MUSIC (page 114) Press to play music files in random order. PHOTO (page 119) Press to play JPEG files in random order. 29 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 30 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Controls and displays 03 8 DISC NAVIGATOR (pages 79, 91)/ TOP MENU (page 76) Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video) disc is loaded. 9 /// and ENTER Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option. While watching D.TV press ENTER to display the Channel List screen. 10 HOME MENU Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can navigate all the functions of the recorder. 11 Colour buttons (RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE) Use when an EPG screen is displayed or when tuned to a data channel of a digital broadcast. The function of each button will be described on-screen, and changes depending on the screen being displayed. 12 GUIDE Press to display the EPG screen; press again to exit. INFO While watching D.TV, press to display the information banner. Press to see additional information for the highlighted item in the EPG. TEXT (page 64) Press to display Teletext information (in European countries except the UK) or to start the MHEG application display (UK only) if available during digital broadcasts. 13 Playback controls (page 75) Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed. / / While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed. 30 En While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. When GUIDE Plus+® is displayed, use to display the previous/next day. PLAY Press to start playback. PREV NEXT Press to skip to the previous or next title/ chapter/track; or to display the previous or next menu page. When GUIDE Plus+® is displayed, use to display the previous/next page. PAUSE Press to pause playback or recording. STOP Press to stop playback. 14 TIMER REC (pages 40, 56) Press to set a timer recording. MENU (page 76) Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video, finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or finalized DVD+R/+RW disc is loaded. When in the GUIDE Plus+® system, use to jump directly to the Menu bar. CM BACK (commercial back) Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the video playing. CM SKIP (commercial skip) Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward through the video playing. 15 Recording controls (page 66) REC Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins. When the RED Action button is visible in a GUIDE Plus+® screen, use for One-Button-Record. F STOP REC Press to stop recording. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 31 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Controls and displays 03 REC MODE (page 65) Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture quality). ONE TOUCH COPY (page 100) Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD. 16 OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 17 PAUSE LIVE TV (page 67) Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast. 18 TV/DVD Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’, in which you get picture and sound from the recorder’s tuner (or an external input). 19 CHANNEL +/– (page 62) Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. 20 HELP Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen. 21 RETURN/EXIT Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or display. Also press to exit the MHEG application. 31 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 04 32 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Getting started Chapter 4 Getting started Switching on and setting up 4 ENTER When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you can make several basic settings using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output. If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting to use the recorder. 1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this recorder. STANDBY/ON Switch on the recorder. 2 When you switch on for the first time, your TV should display the Setup Navigator screen (If the Setup Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the Initial Setup menu; see page 135). • If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will take a few seconds to download country, TV screen size and language information. (Check the manual that came with your TV for compatibility information.) ENTER 3 Choose a language (then press ENTER). Initial Setup Basic Language Clock Setting Digital Tuner Input Line System Analog Tuner Pow er Save Video In/ O ut HELPp Audio In EPG Typeavig Select aator or Audio O ut Setup N Language Recording This will also set the audio, subtitle and DVD menu language preferences. 32 En Start the Setup Navigator. k Setting t Line Complete System this setup before you start using your recorder. er Save Start P p Navigator Cancel Please use the Initial Setup if you want to make more detailed settings. • If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press to select Cancel, then press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator. 5 Select an Aerial Power setting1 for the built-in digital tuner. • On: power is always supplied to the connected aerial, whether the recorder is on or in standby. • Auto: power is only supplied when this recorder is on. • Off: power is never supplied to the aerial. ENTER ENTER 6 Select ‘Auto Scan’ to start scanning for D.TV channels. • Select Do not set if you want to skip D.TV channel setup (because they have already been set up, for example), then skip to step 8 below. • You can go back to the previous screen in the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN/EXIT. ENTER 7 Select your country. The recorder starts scanning for new channels. After the scan is complete the recorder will let you know how many new channels were found. Note 1 If the recorder does not accept the On or Auto setting (the highlight jumps back to Off), check that the antenna is properly connected and that it is not shorted, then try making the setting again. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 33 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Getting started 04 • The country setting will apply to both the digital and analog TV tuners. • The clock will also be set automatically here if D.TV channels are found. • If no new channels were found a message appears asking if you want to scan again. Check the aerial connection before selecting Yes. (If you select No, skip to step 8 below.) ENTER 8 Select the analog TV (A.TV) Auto Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or ‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do not set’. • Downloading channels from your TV Use the Download from TV option to download all the channels that your TV is tuned to. Downloading Pr 5 32/99 Cancel ENTER 9 Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, or ‘Manual’ to set the clock manually. If the clock was already set from a D.TV channel in step 6, this step is skipped. k Setting Auto Channel Setting k Setting Clock Setting Line System er Save P Line System English Auto Scan Download from TV p Navigator Do not Set • Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup (because they have already been set up, for example). • You can only use the Download from TV feature if this recorder is connected to your TV using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable via the AV1 (RGB)-TV connector, and if your TV supports this function (check your TV’s instruction manual for more details). • er Save Auto P Manual Auto clock setting Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the programme. This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically. Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number that broadcasts a time signal, then move the cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER. k Setting Auto Clock Setting • ENTER Select your country. Line System Date er Save Time –– / –– / –––– –– : –– P p Navigator Clock Set CH Pr 1 Start k Setting Country Selection t Line System er Save Country UK P • Auto-tuning channels The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the channel presets. The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After you see that it’s set, select Next to proceed. k Setting Auto Clock Setting t Line System Date er Save Time P Tuning 32/99 Cancel p Navigator Clock Set CH TUE 01 / 01 / 2008 11 : 20 Pr 1 Start Next If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN/EXIT to go back to the previous screen and select Manual. 33 En 04 Getting_Started.fm 34 ページ 2008年3月6日 木曜日 午前11時2分 Getting started 04 • Manual clock setting If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually. Use the / buttons to set your time zone. You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative to GMT. • If no channels were found when scanning for digital TV channels then this screen does not appear and the EPG is set according to the country set in step 7 above. ENTER 11 Select the TV screen type, ‘Wide (16:9)’ or ‘Standard (4:3)’. 1/2 k Setting Manual Clock Setting k Setting TV Screen Size Line System t Line System Time Zone er Save England London er Save Wide (16:9) P P Standard (4:3) p Navigator Summer Time p Navigator Of f Press then use the / buttons to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for summer time, then press ENTER. Select On if you are currently using summer time. t Line System Time Zone er Save England London p Navigator Summer Time Not Compatible 13 ENTER Press to continue after reading the HDD caution. 2/2 k Setting Manual Clock Setting Compatible P • This screen is not displayed when an HDMI signal is being output. On Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings. Time p Navigator Line System er Save p Navigator Don't Know P P k Setting Progressive 1/2 k Setting Manual Clock Setting t Line System Date er Save ENTER 12 Select whether or not your TV is compatible with progressive scan video. k Setting In the event of HDD failure, recordings may be lost or normal playback/recording may t Line not System be possible. er Save As recordings might be lost in case of an HDD P failure, we recommend to use the HDD only as temporary storage media. p Navigator TUE 01 / 01 / 2008 00 : 00 Time Zone England London Please copy recordings you want to keep to recordable DVD. Summer Time On Press ENTER to continue. • Use the / buttons to change the value in the highlighted field. • Use the / buttons to move from one field to another. • Press ENTER to finish setting the time. ENTER 14 Select ‘Finish Setup’ to exit the Setup Navigator, or ‘Go Back’ if you want to start again. k Setting S etu p is co mp lete! t Line System er Save ENTER 34 En 10 Select the EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) type to use. • GUIDE Plus+: Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG (see also Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 35 and Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide on page 39). • Digital EPG: Use the SI EPG (programme information broadcast together with digital channels). Fin ish S etu p p Navigator G o B ack That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator. • If there are blank channels with no station, you can set these to skip using the manual channel setting. See Manual CH Setting on page 137. 04 Getting_Started.fm 35 ページ 2008年3月6日 木曜日 午前11時2分 Getting started For users receiving digital broadcast services This unit can set its internal clock automatically from digital broadcasts. However, depending on the broadcaster, the clock information received may not be accurate. Use the following procedure (while the recorder is not recording) to set the clock manually. HOME MENU 1 scan for available channels, as these are all used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of these things are not yet set, please run the Setup Navigator first (see Switching on and setting up on page 32). TV listings information is received via ‘Host Channels’. In order to receive the correct TV listings information for your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information. The initial download can take up to 24 hours, but once this is done, all future updates are automatic. Display the Home Menu. 2 ENTER Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Initial Setup’. 3 ENTER Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Clock Setting’. 4 04 GUIDE 1 Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu. Highlight the time setting. ENTER 5 Press to display the manual clock setting screen. 6 Set the correct time. Return to automatic clock setting • To return to the automatic clock setting, follow the instructions for ‘Replace Channels’ (page 135). Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system The language and country settings are already set to whatever you selected in the Setup Navigator. 2 ENTER Highlight ‘Postal Code’. This section is only applicable if you chose to use the GUIDE Plus+ system as the EPG type in step 10 of the Setup Navigator above. The GUIDE Plus+® system is a free, interactive on-screen television programming guide. The system offers programme listings for all major channels, one-touch recording, search by genre, recommendations according to your profile and more. For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function correctly, it is important that you set the language and country correctly in the Setup Navigator, and that you have performed a 35 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 04 36 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Getting started 3 code. ENTER Enter your postal The system uses your postal code to identify which TV listings data is correct for the area in which you live, so it is important that you enter it correctly. 4 If you are using an external receiver (such as a satellite receiver) with the supplied G-LINK cable, complete this step, otherwise jump to step 5 below. • Select your reception method (Terrestrial, Cable or Satellite). • Select your provider (if applicable). • Select the brand of your external receiver. • Identify which input your external receiver is connected to. After completing these steps the recorder will try and communicate with your external receiver and change the channel via the G-LINK cable. If the channel was successfully changed, select Yes to confirm. If the channel did not change, select No. The GUIDE Plus+ system will try other codes assigned to your external receiver. If none of the codes changes the channel successfully, tune your external receiver to the Host Channel for your country (refer to step 5 below) and leave it on overnight. The recorder needs to be in standby; it will wake up automatically and download new codes from the Host Channel. The next day, try this setup process again: • Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ screen. • Press to highlight the Menu bar, then use to reach the Setup area and select Setup. • Continue setting up from the start of this step again. If your external receiver still doesn’t respond to the G-LINK controller, please call customer support and report the brand and model of your external receiver. See also GUIDE Plus+® FAQ and troubleshooting on page 50. • See Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver on page 18 for more on using the supplied G-LINK cable. • Select External Receiver 1, 2 or 3, then press ENTER. (If you have just one external receiver, use External Receiver 1. You can add further receivers in 2 and 3 if you need to.) After pressing ENTER: 36 En 5 Identify the Host Channel for your country. The TV listings information available in the GUIDE Plus+ system is distributed throughout Europe by selected broadcasters called Host Channels. It is important that the host (analog) channel for your country is correctly identified in order to receive listings information (EPG download). Follow A, B or C below depending on your setup: DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 37 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Getting started A If you are not using an external receiver, this recorder will automatically scan all channels for the Host Channel: • Leave the recorder in standby overnight (do not leave it switched on). B If you are using an external receiver, you need to identify the Host Channel from the table below: Country/ Region Host Channels Austria Eurosport Belgium RTL-TVI France Canal+ Germany Eurosport Italy MTV Netherlands Eurosport Spain Tele 5 Switzerland Eurosport UK ITV, Eurosport ITV is analog only. Use Eurosport if you are a SKY subscriber and you no longer have an analog terrestrial antenna. Comments Analog only Analog only Analog only • Tune your external receiver to the appropriate Host Channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in standby overnight. C If you use both an external receiver and this recorder as sources, follow the instructions above for setting up without an external receiver. Only if this is unsuccessful try the external receiver method. 04 About EPG download • EPG data can only be received when the recorder is in standby. (When not using the recorder, therefore, please switch it into standby.) If you’re using an external receiver, leave this on when EPG data is downloading. • If you cannot receive any of the Host Channels (see the above table) then you won’t be able to use the GUIDE Plus+ system. In this case do not set the postal code (or set Country to Other) in the GUIDE Plus+ setup screen. (When GUIDE Plus+ service starts in your area, set the postal code again.) If digital broadcasts start in your area, please set the EPG Type Select setting in the Initial Setup menu to Digital EPG. • Even if you can’t use the EPG functions where you live, you can still set VIDEO Plus+ recordings and manual recordings — see Setting a manual recording on page 47. • The front panel display shows EPG when receiving data. If you power on the recorder during an EPG download, the download is cancelled. • EPG data may be received several times a day. All updates are automatic. • When downloading EPG data, the recorder may sound as though it is on. This is normal. 37 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 38 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Getting started 04 Checking the downloaded data the following day GUIDE 1 Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen. You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV listings information. Use the / buttons to review the list. If you notice that there are channels missing, or that there are channels in the list that you don’t get, go to the Editor screen: • Press repeatedly until the Menu bar is highlighted. • Press until Editor is highlighted. The main area of the screen now shows a list of channels. Those that are turned ON are displayed in the grid; those that are OFF are hidden. Use the /// buttons to move down the list and turn channels ON or OFF as necessary. • For any channel that you turn ON, the GUIDE Plus+ system will need to know how it is received (the source) and on which programme number. The source may be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or an external receiver. The programme number is the number on which the channel can be found on its receiving device/source. The entry in the Editor screen must match this number for correct recording of that channel. • The above is especially important for the ‘Host Channel’. Please make sure that the Host Channel is always switched ON. 38 En 2 Change the programme numbers as you like. Changing the programme numbers allows you to decide the order in which the channels change when stepping through them sequentially. You can do this to group certain channels together, for example. Name BBC1 BBC2 ITV CH4 CH5 BBC3 ITV2 E4 UKGOL On/Off On On On On On On On Off On Source D. TV D. TV D. TV D. TV D. TV Ext. Rec. 1 D. TV D. TV D. TV Prog. No. 001 002 003 004 005 007 006 014 017 3 When you’re done, press the BLUE Action button (Home) to get back to the GUIDE Plus+ home screen. • You can find detailed information on using the GUIDE Plus+ system in the following chapter. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 39 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide 05 Chapter 5 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup menu) is set to GUIDE Plus+. The GUIDE Plus+® system The GUIDE Plus+® system* is a free, interactive on-screen television programming guide.1 The system provides programme listings for all major channels, one-touch recording, searching by genre, recommendations according to your profile and more. The GUIDE Plus+ system is a convenient way to find out what’s on right now or during the coming week, by channel or by genre. The GUIDE Plus+ system also allows you to automatically set your viewing and recording selections quickly and easily. In order to receive the correct TV listings information for your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system and ‘download’ the TV listings information. If you haven’t already done this, please turn to Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 35 before proceeding. * GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW, VIDEO Plus+, G-LINK are (1) registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates. Legal Notice GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/ OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAMME SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/ OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. Using the GUIDE Plus+® system All the various features and areas are colourcoded for ease of navigation. All screens (with the exception of some setup screens) have the following common elements: 1 3 4 5 2 6 1 Video window – Allows you to continue watching the current programme while using the GUIDE Plus+ system. 2 Information panels – Display programme promotions or instructions on the GUIDE Plus+ system. 3 Action bar – Colour-coded Action buttons change function depending on the area. 4 Information box – Shows short programme descriptions or help menus. Note 1 The GUIDE Plus+ system can’t be used when the Input Line System is set to 525 System (see also Input Line System on page 134). 39 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 05 40 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide 5 Menu bar – Gives access to the various areas of the GUIDE Plus+ system. 6 Grid – Shows TV listings information for the next seven days by channel and time. GUIDE Plus+ navigation The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons you’ll use to navigate the GUIDE Plus+ system. Key What it does REC Press to set or cancel OneButton-Recording. GUIDE Press to display the GUIDE Plus+ screen (also use to exit). /// Use to navigate screens (highlight an item). One-Button-Record The RED Action button (Record) is visible anytime you can highlight a programme title, including from the Grid, after a search, or in your recommendations in the My TV area. The programme name, date, channel, recording start and end times are all set automatically when you set a timer recording using One-Button-Record. If you need to, you can edit the settings at any time before the recording is due to start (see Editing a scheduled recording on page 45). 1 Highlight a programme title. RED, GREEN, Action buttons that change YELLOW, BLUE functionality depending on the Area. 40 En MENU Press to jump directly to the Menu bar. TIMER REC Press to go directly to the Schedule area. INFO Press to display extended information for the current programme. ENTER Press to confirm a selection or to leave the GUIDE Plus+ screen. Number buttons Use for numeric entry. PREV/ NEXT Press to select the previous/ next page of information (in the grid, for example). / Press to select the previous/ next day. 2 Press the RED Action button (Record). The programme is now set for recording. When the programme is due to start, the recorder will switch to the correct channel and start recording1. • You can also use the REC button to set the recording. • You can review the shows you have set to record in the Schedule Area (see also The Schedule Area on page 44). Note 1 Recording times set using the GUIDE Plus+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in the programme broadcast schedules. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 41 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide Lock/Unlock video window When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system, the channel you were watching remains visible in the video window. The date stamp above the window lets you know the channel, date and time. The default setting for this window is ‘locked’, as indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video window. When locked, the video window always shows the channel you were previously watching as you move up and down through the listings grid. If you prefer, you can unlock the video window so that as you highlight different channels in the listings grid, that channel is shown in the video window. 1 Highlight a channel logo. 05 cursor buttons, then press ENTER to return to the previous screen on that channel. Areas The GUIDE Plus+® system consists of seven Areas. All Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar. • Grid – The GUIDE Plus+ system Home Area. Displays TV listings information for the next seven days by time and channel. • Search – Search for TV programmes by category (e.g., Sport), subcategory (e.g., Football) or keyword. • My TV – Set up a profile and receive recommendations according to your preferences. • Schedule – Show all scheduled recordings. • Info – Area for additional information, such as weather (not available in all regions). • Editor – Change channel settings. • Setup – Setup the GUIDE Plus+® system. The Grid Area Channel logos are displayed to the left of programme titles. 2 Press the RED Action button (Unlock). The padlock icon above the video window becomes unlocked. It remains unlocked for the remainder of your current TV viewing session. If you want to lock the video window again, follow the same procedure. The RED Action button will now act as Lock. Channel mosaic screen You can switch the display style of channels in the Grid Area, Schedule Area or My TV Area from a list to a mosaic of channel icons by pressing the YELLOW Action button. Select the channel icon you want using the The Grid is the main TV listings screen of the GUIDE Plus+ system and is the first screen that you see when you press GUIDE. You can see TV listings for the next seven days, starting with the current day. When you highlight a programme in the Grid, you can see information about it in the Information Box, including title, synopsis, channel, source, time and length. If there is an i symbol in the Information Box, it means that there is an extended synopsis available. Press the INFO button to see it. In some countries, you can also see a rating for a particular programme (mostly movies). These ratings are provided by local partners, such as TV magazines. From the Grid Area you can: • View and scroll through programme listings • Read programme synopses 41 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 05 42 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide • Tune to a programme that’s currently showing1 • Set a programme to record • Lock or unlock the video window • Access Information panels 1 bar. Select ‘Search’ from the Menu 2 Select a category and a subcategory. Browsing the Grid Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid: /// (cursor buttons) – Navigate the Grid PREV/ NEXT – Previous/next page / – Previous/next day BLUE Action button – Return to the current time/date in the Grid ENTER – Press on the current selection to exit the GUIDE Plus+ system and start watching the programme The Search Area From the Search Area you can: • • • • • Search by category Search by subcategory Search by keyword Read programme synopses Tune to a programme that’s currently showing • Set a programme to record • Access Information panels • If you choose All as the subcategory, all programmes in the category you selected will show up in the search results. ENTER 3 Start the search. The search results are shown sorted by time and date. • If no search results are displayed, it means there are no programmes for the current day that match your search criteria. Searching You can search for programmes by category, subcategory or by keyword (My Choice). Categories for searching include Movies (purple), Sport (green), Children (blue) and Others (teal). In some countries there is a further subcategory available called ‘Tip of the Day’. These are programmes recommended by a local partner, such as a TV magazine. 42 En Note 1 If you’re using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds while it tunes to the channel. This is normal. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 43 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide Using My Choice keywords for a search My TV Area In addition to the standard categories, you can also set your own keywords. The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile. You can define a profile by channels, themes and/or keywords. As soon as a personal profile has been set, the GUIDE Plus+ system continuously scans the TV listings for the next seven days. Whenever you access the My TV Area, a list of programmes matching your profile appears. 1 Access My Choice. 05 From the My TV Area you can: 2 Press the YELLOW Action button to add a keyword. ENTER 3 Enter a keyword to appear in the menu. • Set up a profile by channel, theme and/ or keyword • Edit and delete profiles • Read programme synopses • Tune to a programme that’s currently showing • Set a programme to record • Access Information panels Setting up a profile You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16 channels, four categories and 16 keywords. 1 Select ‘My TV’ from the Menu bar. 2 Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile. When you’re finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and continue. 4 Start the keyword search. • You can delete or edit keywords using the RED and GREEN Action buttons. • When you have set more than two keywords, an All subcategory automatically appears which allows you to search for all your keywords. ENTER Channels is now highlighted. 43 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 05 44 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide 3 To add a channel to your profile, press the YELLOW Action button. Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels. 4 To add a category to your profile, highlight ‘Categories’ and press the YELLOW Action button. 5 To add a keyword to your profile, highlight ‘Keywords’ and press the YELLOW Action button. Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select characters from the onscreen keyboard. When you’re finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and continue. 6 Press ENTER to activate your profile. • You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step 5. • You can edit or delete your profile using the RED and GREEN Action buttons. The Schedule Area The Schedule Area is where you can set, see, edit and delete scheduled (timer) recordings. From the Schedule Area you can: Select a category from the Search Area categories and press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to four categories. 44 En • Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording • Set, edit or delete a VIDEO Plus+ recording • Set, edit or delete a manual recording DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 45 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide Editing a scheduled recording You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording, or delete it if you no longer require it1. 05 4 Enter a name for the scheduled recording. 1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording. Use the /// buttons followed by ENTER to select characters from the onscreen keyboard. • If you only want to edit the recording quality, frequency, destination, timing or genre settings, skip to step 5 below. 2 Press the GREEN Action button (Edit). 3 Use the cursor and number buttons to edit the recording date, start time, end time and channel. Use the / buttons or the number buttons to edit. After entering the whole name, press the GREEN Action button to continue. 5 Highlight the right recording tile. 6 Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change the recording quality. Select from AUTO2, XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP or a manual recording mode (see Manual Recording on page 141 and Manual recording modes on page 152). Press the GREEN Action button to go to continue, or the RED Action button to go back. Note 1 See About timer recordings on page 69 for more information about scheduled recordings. 2 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD. 45 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 05 46 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide 7 Press the GREEN Action button (Frequency) to change the recording frequency. • Auto Replace Recording is only available as an option with regular daily or weekly recordings. 9 Press to access the extended recording options. Select from the various options for one-time, daily and weekly recordings. 8 Press YELLOW Action button (Destination) to select the recording destination. • If you want to record to a particular HDD genre, use the YELLOW Action button (Genre) to select one. • Use the GREEN Action button (Timing) to add extra time to the end of the recording (+0, +10, +20, +30 or VPS/ PDC2 (V–P)). • Press to display the standard recording options again. Select from DVD, HDD or HDDr (Auto Replace Recording)1. 46 En Note 1 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 141) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality (MN4 for DVD+R/+RW) then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead. • If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully. • If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programmes will be erased. 2 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby. • Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on. • Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC. • VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO. 05 Guide Plus+ EPG_EU.fm 47 ページ 2008年3月6日 木曜日 午前11時7分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide Deleting a scheduled recording 1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording. 05 3 Use the number buttons to enter a PlusCode programming number. Please enter the PlusCode programming number and press ENTER to confirm. 2 Press the RED Action button (Delete). The scheduled event is deleted. Setting a VIDEO Plus+® recording 1 Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar. • If you live in an area not yet covered by the GUIDE Plus+ system you may also have to input a channel number. Follow the on-screen display to do this. 4 Press ENTER to confirm. Setting a manual recording 1 2 Press the RED Action button (VIDEO Plus+). Select ‘Schedule’ from the Menu bar. 2 Press the GREEN Action button (Manual). 47 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 05 48 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide 3 Use the number and /// buttons to enter the recording date, then press the GREEN Action button (Next). The Editor Area The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage your channels. Any changes you make here will affect what is displayed in the Grid Area. The Editor Area is mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to make any manual changes as necessary. You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become available in your area, or if you change from cable to satellite, say, or move house. From the Editor Area you can: 4 In the same way, enter the recording start time, followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to confirm. 5 Enter the recording end time in the same way, followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to confirm. 6 Use the number buttons to enter a channel number, then press the GREEN Action button (Next) to confirm. D.TV • Display/hide channels in the grid (switch the channel on/off) • Select a channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1, Ext. Rec. 2, etc.) • Enter a channel programme number Switching a channel on/off You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor Area. 1 Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar. 001 Name BBC1 BBC2 ITV CH4 CH5 BBC3 ITV2 E4 UKGOL Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW Action button (Mosaic) and use the // / buttons to select a channel from the mosaic, followed by ENTER. The Info Area This area is reserved for additional information such as news, weather reports, stock quotes, and so on, and varies by region. (Note that this feature is not available in all countries/regions.) 48 En On/Off On On On On On On On Off On Source D. TV D. TV D. TV D. TV D. TV Ext. Rec. 1 D. TV D. TV D. TV Prog. No. 001 002 003 004 005 007 006 014 017 2 Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you want to switch on or off. 3 Press the RED Action button to switch the channel on or off. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 49 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide Changing the source and programme number 1 Select ‘Editor’ from the Menu bar. 05 The Setup Area The Setup Area is where you can set up the GUIDE Plus+ system for your particular region, TV reception conditions, and so on. Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+ setup Name BBC1 BBC2 ITV CH4 CH5 BBC3 ITV2 E4 UKGOL On/Off On On On On On On On Off On Source D. TV D. TV D. TV D. TV D. TV Ext. Rec. 1 D. TV D. TV D. TV Prog. No. 001 002 003 004 005 007 006 014 017 1 Select ‘Setup’ from the Menu bar. Press ENTER to access the Basic Setup screen. Basic Setup 2 Highlight the right channel tile of the channel you want to make a change to. 3 Press the RED Action button to change the channel source, or the GREEN Action button to enter a programme number. Each press of the RED Action button changes the channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1, etc.). To set a programme number, use the number buttons to enter a programme number then press ENTER (When set to A.TV or D.TV, make sure that the programme number matches the preset number of this recorder for what you want to record). Host Channel Setup GUIDE Plus+ System Information 2 Highlight the part you want to change. You can change the Language, Country, Postal Code1 and the External Receiver settings. 3 Press ENTER to confirm. Note 1 Making changes to the Country or Postal Code settings may require a new download of TV listings information. This can take up to 24 hours. 49 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 05 50 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide Manual Host Channel setup The GUIDE Plus+ system will automatically identify your Host Channel as soon as the recorder is put into standby for the first time. See the table on page 37 for a list of all the European Host Channels. If you know your Host Channel details (source and programme number) or if the automatic identification did not provide the expected result, you can identify your Host Channel manually. Select Host Channel Setup in the Setup area and follow the instructions on the TV. Select the correct source (e.g., internal tuner or external receiver) and enter the respective programme number (e.g., if you have to press 9 on the remote to watch your Host Channel, enter 9 as the programme number). When you next switch the recorder into standby the GUIDE Plus+ system will complete the Host Channel setup. You can reset the Host Channel settings at any time back to the default setting of automatic. Please be aware that resetting the Host Channel will erase all TV listings data. GUIDE Plus+® FAQ and troubleshooting This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list please consult the GUIDE Plus+ website at: www.europe.guideplus.com FAQ • When I tried setting up my external receiver I could not get any of the attempts to work, what should I do? There could be several reasons why your external receiver could not be controlled. – The connections could be wrong. Make sure that the G-LINK cable is connected to the G-LINK connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in front of the external receiver, pointing towards the IR receiver of your external receiver. See Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver on page 18. – The code that is listed under your brand could be wrong. Please try other codes for your brand under satellite, cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area and choose one of the three options (cable, satellite or terrestrial) that you have not already tried. Follow the onscreen prompts to make sure that the GUIDE Plus+ system can change channels on your external receiver. If it does not work, repeat the process, choosing different reception and external receiver combinations until you have tried all the codes for your brand of receiver that are already in the GUIDE Plus+ system. If it still does not work, see below on how to receive new codes overnight. – The unit has not yet received new codes. The nightly data downloads frequently include new codes for controlling external receivers. Please tune your external receiver to your local Host Channel and leave it on overnight. 50 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 51 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide Switch this recorder into standby. The next morning, please perform the GUIDE Plus+ setup again to see if your external receiver can now be controlled. terrestrial or cable connection only to receive data this way. It is important that you identify your Host Channel correctly in the Editor Area. – The external receiver that you use is currently not supported. If, after leaving your external receiver on overnight, and doing the Reception and External Receiver Setup again, it still does not respond, please call Customer Support to report your brand and model. • After I performed the initial set-up I found that the line-up for all the channels received via the external set-top box is incorrect. How do I correct this? • My external receiver was successfully setup. However I have found that when the GUIDE Plus+ system has to change to a channel with a three-digit programme number in the external receiver’s preset, it does not work. It looks like the GUIDE Plus+ system can only send two digits. With the number of channels increasing, the number of digits has increased as well. While older boxes use only two digits, newer boxes require up to four. It is possible that you selected an older code for your brand during set-up. Please access the Setup Area, select External Receiver and repeat the setup for your brand (Note: Every time you see the on-screen question about whether the receiver has changed to a certain channel, the GUIDE Plus+ system has sent a different code). Try all the different codes until your GUIDE Plus+ system can control your external receiver correctly. If you have no success, try to receive new codes overnight. • I used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or analog cable without a set-top box. Now, I have “upgraded” to a satellite system or to digital cable with external receiver. What should I do to receive data for the GUIDE Plus+ system? You can try to receive your Host Channel through your new reception method. If you have problems to receive data we recommend that you keep your analog 05 You can change the line-up in the editor according to your preferences. Access the Editor Area. Select the channels that you would like to change. Change the source and preset number according to your preferences. • I performed the set-up but after many hours I still have a blank EPG what is going wrong? There are several possibilities: – Connections are wrong. See Connections on page 14 to double check everything. – The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was completed incorrectly. Try setting it up again (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 35). – Your cabling and setup is OK, but the recorder has not been connected for enough time to receive the TV listings data. Leave the recorder in standby overnight. – For external receiver users only: The connections and setup are OK, but the external receiver was not tuned to the correct Host Channel. Check the list of Host Channels (see step 5 of Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 35) and leave the recorder in standby and the external receiver on overnight tuned to the correct Host Channel. – You live in a country/region where the GUIDE Plus+ system is not yet available. Check the list of countries to see if you are in a region that is supported. 51 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 05 52 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the GUIDE Plus+® electronic programme guide • I used the One-Button-Record feature (RED Action button) to set a recording, but I recorded the wrong channel. If the channel to be recorded is received via the external receiver first make sure that the external receiver was left switched on. Next, in the Editor Area, make sure that the channel to be recorded is correctly set: Access the Editor Area. Check the source and programme number of the channel that you wanted to record. Change the source and preset numbers if incorrect. If you are recording from the recorder’s internal tuner (the A.TV or D.TV setting), make sure that the programme number is the same as the preset number set on this recorder. If they are different, go to the Editor Area and change the programme number to match the recorder’s preset number. • The TV listings information doesn’t update. The latest TV listings information is automatically downloaded by the recorder overnight. This only happens if the recorder is in standby; if the recorder is left on, it will not download. When not using the recorder, please switch it into standby. Data downloads can take several hours. The front panel display shows EPG when downloading. If you switch the recorder on while EPG is displayed, the download will be cancelled. • The GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in my area, but when I switch the recorder into standby, after a while the front panel display shows EPG. Can I stop this from happening? If the GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in your area, please do not set the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ setup (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+® system on page 35). When the GUIDE Plus+ service starts in your area, please set the postal code again. 52 En • The automatic Host Channel search failed or the GUIDE Plus+ system identified the wrong Host Channel for my region. You can identify your Host Channel manually. See Manual Host Channel setup on page 50 for how to do this. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 53 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the digital electronic programme guide 06 Chapter 6 Using the digital electronic programme guide This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup menu) is set to Digital EPG. The Digital EPG system The Digital EPG shows a table of scheduled digital TV programmes and detailed information about individual programmes. It also allows you easily to select and tune to a particular programme.1 The Digital EPG screen consists of Programme Information and General Programme List. This section describes information displayed in the schedule and information windows. Note that the recorder’s clock must be set to the correct time and date to ensure all relevant EPG information is displayed. 5 Indicates the programme set for recording 6 Appears when other programmes (often short ones) have been scheduled for the same period 7 Programme title 8 Time dividers • The general programme list may show sections whose bottom right corners have been folded. This indicates that other programmes have been scheduled for that period. To view the title of such a programme and related information, highlight a folded section, and then press /. Programme Information 4 1 General Programme List 1 2 3 5 D007 2 6 D007 5 6 7 3 4 8 1 Appears when the schedule table can be scrolled forward or backward 2 Time schedule 3 Channel list 4 Highlights the currently selected channel 1 Channel number 2 Station name 3 Programme title 4 Appear when other programmes have been scheduled for the same period 5 Programme schedule 6 Programme genre Note 1 EPG information is only viewable for D.TV programmes that provide EPG information. 53 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 54 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the digital electronic programme guide 06 Using the Digital EPG • To quit the display of detailed information, press INFO again (or RETURN/EXIT). Using the Digital EPG you can check the schedule of digital TV programmes, view information about desired programmes, and/or select programmes. D007 ************ 13:40 - 14:05 ************* ************************** GUIDE 1 Press to display the Digital EPG screen. The EPG screen updates automatically if the EPG data is acquired successfully. If not, the Digital EPG screen shows a blank image. 2 Select a TV programme. More... GUIDE 4 Press to exit the Digital EPG screen. Setting timer programmes D007 Using the Digital EPG, it’s easy to set digital TV programmes for recording 2. GUIDE 1 Press to display the Digital EPG screen. • Press PREV/ NEXT to skip to the previous/next channel list page. • Information about the selected programme appears in the information window.1 • To watch a programme currently on air, select the programme (then press ENTER). • You can check information about programmes scheduled up to one week ahead, depending on conditions. • Depending on conditions, it may take some time to acquire EPG data. INFO 3 Press to view more information about the selected programme. Detailed information appears in the schedule window. ENTER 2 Select a programme. D007 • Select a programme currently on-air: press ENTER to close the Digital EPG screen and watch the channel immediately, or press RED to set the programme for recording immediately. • Select a programme not yet started then press ENTER or RED to set the programme for recording. If the screen contains further information, More ... is displayed. 54 En Note 1 The general programme list does not show programmes that have already finished. 2 For more information on timer programmes, see About timer recordings on page 69. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 55 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the digital electronic programme guide 3 Enter the timer recording settings. Use the / buttons to select a field; use the / buttons to change the value1. Date D.TV003 Start SUN 1/4 Detailed Settings Record To Recording Mode VPS/PDC Auto Replace Rec. Genre 4 If you want to change the recording mode, recording destination, etc., select ‘Set Detailed’. In this area you can set: Record to – Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD for DVD recording2. Timer Programme Set Manhattan Open Tennis CH 06 Stop 18:00 19:00 Enter Details HDD XP ----------No Category Extend Off Store Programme Set Detailed Set Title Name Cancel VPS/PDC 0/8 • CH – Choose a channel (Pr 1 to Pr 99 for analog channels and available digital channels (excluding skip channels)), or one of the external inputs from which to record. • Date – Choose a date up to one month in advance, or select a daily or weekly programme. • Start – Set the recording start time. Recording Mode – Select from AUTO3, XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP (see Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 65). If Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the LPCM setting, XP+ or MN (press ENTER then use the / buttons to select the level). VPS/PDC4 – Choose whether or not to use VPS/PDC when making timer recordings of analog programmes (see About timer recordings on page 69). Auto Replace Rec. – Automatically erases the previous daily or weekly recording when the next one is recorded. Genre – Select a record genre (for HDD recording only). • Stop – Set the recording end time (maximum length of a timer recording is 24 hours). • Extend – Extend the end time of the timer recording (select Off, 10, 20 or 30 mins.). Note 1 You cannot change the CH, Date, Start, Stop, Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On (see page 56). 2 • For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 141) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality (MN4 for DVD+R/+RW) then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead. • If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully. • If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programmes will be erased. 3 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD. 4 • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby. • Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on. • Up to eight timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC. • VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO. 55 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 06 56 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the digital electronic programme guide EPG Link1 (UK only) – Choose whether or not to have this device automatically record scheduled programmes from the Digital EPG even if the times in which they are broadcast change. Series Recording2 (UK only) – Choose whether or not to record all programmes from a series when you make a recording from the Digital EPG (for HDD recordings only). 5 After entering all the timer recording information, highlight ‘Store Programme’ and press ENTER. A red clock icon appears for the programme. GUIDE 6 Press to exit the Digital EPG screen. Tip • To enter a title name for the timer recording in advance, select Set Title Name and follow the on-screen display. Editing a timer programme You can change any of the settings in a timer programme before the recording is due to start. Even if a programme is currently being recorded, you can program a new end time or edit its extend time parameter. TIMER REC 1 Press to display the Timer Programme View screen. You can also access the Timer Programme View screen from the Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Timer Recording, then Timer Recording). 56 En This screen shows all the timer programmes currently set. Timer Programme View SUN 25/3 15:00 VPS/PDC 0/8 Tmr Pgms 3/32 Manhattan Open Tennis OK SUN 25/3 18:00 – 19:00 Pr 4 OK World Journey MON 26/3 19:30 – 21:00 Pr 6 Flower MON – FRI 13:30 – 14:00 Until 20/4 Pr 8 New Input HDD Remain DVD Remain 59h59m(SP) 1h59m(SP) • Each row is for one timer recording programme, with the date and time information, channel, recording mode, DVD or HDD and recording status. • The amount of free space available on the HDD and the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown towards the bottom of the screen. • In the upper-right corner, the number of timer programmes already set is shown next to Tmr Pgms. • If there are more than five timer programmes already set, press NEXT to switch page (go back using the PREV button). • You can also delete a timer programme before it’s started (before the recorder enters timer recording standby) by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR. See also Deleting a timer programme on page 58. 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to change. If you want to set a new timer programme, select ‘New Input’ and skip to step 4. Note 1 • You cannot set an EPG Link when recording mode is set to AUTO. • You cannot change the CH, Date, Start, Stop, Extend and title name when you have EPG Link set to On. • When you have EPG Link set to On and you set a timer recording for a programme that is divided into multiple parts, all parts of that programme are recorded automatically. In the programme list, the earliest part of the programme to be recorded has a red icon, with successive parts indicated by a gray icon. Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as divided programmes. 2 • In the programme list, the earliest programme to be recorded has a red icon, with successive programmes indicated by a gray icon. • There is a limit to the number of programmes you can schedule to record with the Series Recording function. • Data provided by the broadcaster determines which programmes are classified as part of a series. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 57 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the digital electronic programme guide 3 Press then select ‘Modify’ from the command menu panel. Alternatively, press ENTER. ENTER The Timer Programme Set screen appears from which you can edit the settings. ENTER 4 Enter the timer recording settings. Use the / buttons to select a field; use the / buttons to change the value. For more information on the options available at the Timer Programme Set screen, see Setting timer programmes on page 54. ENTER 5 After entering all the timer recording information, highlight ‘Store Programme’ and press ENTER. The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The timer programme you just input appears in the list. The rightmost column shows various timer recording status messages: • OK – Can be recorded. • Time Over – Not enough space on the HDD (the recording won’t finish). • Over 12h – Recording time of over 12 hours set (when recording to the HDD the recording will be split into two titles). • Overlap – Two timer programmes partially or completely overlap. The one starting earlier will take priority. • Until ... (eg., Until 13/8) – For a regular recording, the last programme that could be recorded is shown. • Data Over – Can’t record because the disc management area of the disc is full. • Cancel Once – A regular timer programme is set to skip. • Can’t Rec – Not possible to record. • Title Over – Can’t record because there is already the maximum number of titles on the disc (HDD: 999; DVD: 99). • Recording – The programme is currently recording. 06 • Standby – The recorder is in timer recording standby. • Valid Until ... (eg., Valid Until 13/8) (UK only) – When you have set to make a series recording of a programme that has no new scheduled broadcasts, the date displayed indicates the last day until which the scheduled programme settings remain valid. (If the programme is not broadcast for over 13 weeks, its settings are automatically deleted.) • No Broadcast (UK only) – Displays when a programme for which you had the EPG Link set to On does not record because the date of the scheduled recording has already passed. • nothing displayed – Another timer recording or copying is in progress. HOME MENU 6 Press to exit the timer recording screen. Note • If you set a DVD timer recording but there is no recordable DVD disc loaded, or the disc loaded doesn’t have enough free space for the complete recording, Recovery is shown. In this case (unless you load a suitable disc before the recording actually starts), the recorder will use the HDD for recording. (The message Can’t Rec will appear if there are already 999 titles on the HDD or if there is not enough free space on the HDD for recording.) • When you have EPG Link or Series Recording set to On, any changes in broadcast time or division of broadcasts are automatically accommodated for and your scheduled recordings are carried out without any additional settings. As a result, even when you have not scheduled programmes to record at the same time, changes in broadcasting schedules can cause scheduled recordings to overlap. 57 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 58 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the digital electronic programme guide 06 Deleting a timer programme You can delete timer programmes you no longer need. TIMER REC 1 Press TIMER REC. TIMER REC 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to search. 3 Press then select ‘Alternate Search’ from the command menu panel. • The search results are displayed. Choose the programme you would like to record and press either the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording. ENTER 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to erase. 3 Press then select ‘Erase’ from the command menu panel. • Select Yes to confirm or No to cancel. ENTER • You can also just press CLEAR when the timer programme is highlighted. Skipping a regular timer programme If you’ve set a regular daily or weekly timer programme, you can set the recorder to skip the next scheduled recording. TIMER REC 1 Press TIMER REC. Searching for series (UK only) You can search for broadcasts of programmes of the same series as a programme you have scheduled to record1. TIMER REC 1 Press TIMER REC. 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to search. 3 Press then select ‘Series Search’ from the command menu panel. • The search results are displayed. Choose the programme you would like to record and press either the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording. ENTER 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to skip. 3 Press then select ‘Cancel Once’ from the command menu panel. • In the timer programme list, Cancel Once appears by the programme. ENTER • You can also just press PAUSE when the timer programme is highlighted. Checking for alternative broadcast times (UK only) You can check to see if a programme you have scheduled to record is airing at an alternative time slot1. 58 En Searching for recommendations (UK only) You can search for recommended programmes generated from the content of the programmes you have scheduled to record1. TIMER REC 1 Press TIMER REC. Note 1 • Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster. • This function may not be applicable to all programmes. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 59 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Using the digital electronic programme guide 2 Highlight the timer programme you want to search. 06 2 In the ‘Date’ field select a date (within one week) to search in. Date 3 Press then select ‘Recommendation Search’ from the command menu panel. The search results are displayed. Choose the programme you would like to record and press either the RED button or ENTER to schedule a recording. ENTER Sun.12.Sep Time 12:00 Genre Select 0/16 • • • • • • Search Cancel Other useful EPG functions 3 In the ‘Time’ field select the time of day (0:00 to 23:00) to search in. EPG Jump 1 Press GREEN when the Digital EPG screen (Programme List, Detailed Information or Search Result) is displayed. 2 In the ‘Date’ field select a date (within one week) to jump to. Date Mon.13.Sep Time 14:00 Jump 4 In the ‘Genre’ field, select the genre to search for. You can search for multiple genres by pressing ENTER after each genre. 5 ENTER Select ‘OK’. ENTER 6 Select ‘Search’. The results of your search are displayed. Cancel Series Search 3 In the ‘Time’ field select a time of the day (0:00 to 23:00) to jump to. ENTER 4 Select ‘Jump’. The Programme List for the specified day and time is displayed. EPG Search 1 Press YELLOW when the EPG screen (Programme List, Detailed Information or Search Result) is displayed. (UK only) 1 Select a programme on the EPG screen (Programme List or Search Result). INFO 2 Press to display Detailed Information. 3 Press YELLOW. Programmes of the same series as the selected programme are displayed at Search Result.1 Note 1 • Programme search results are based upon data provided by the broadcaster. • This function may not be applicable to all programmes. 59 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 07 60 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Recording Chapter 7 Recording About DVD recording This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL media. DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for Video mode or VR mode recording. Each has its advantages, and it depends on what you want to do with the recording which mode you choose. If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way, VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying, and changing the way the video is presented. Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard DVD players (many of which won’t play VR mode discs1). Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all recording on that disc will be in that mode. DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR mode recording. DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR mode recording. DVD+R discs do not require initializing. Important • The table below shows the maximum number of titles recordable per disc and the maximum number of chapters per title: 60 En Max. titles (per disc) Max. chapters (per title) DVD-R/-RW Video mode 99 99 DVD-R/-RW/-RAM VR mode 99 999*1 DVD+R/+RW 49 99*2 Disc type/rec. format *1 *2 A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc. A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc. • This recorder cannot play or record unfinalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R discs recorded on another recorder. DVD+RW discs recorded on another recorder are playable on this recorder but are not recordable. • The maximum continuous recording time for one title is eight hours when using a DVD+R/+RW disc. • If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the total number of recordable titles remaining may not increase. • Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 148. • Fingerprints, dirt and small scratches on a disc can affect playback and/or recording performance. Please take proper care of your discs. • If power to the recorder is cut (due to a power outage, the plug being pulled from the power outlet, etc.) during recording, editing, initializing, finalizing or other operation, some recorded material on the Note 1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 61 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Recording disc, or the disc itself, may become unusable. In this case, try re-initializing the disc (DVD-RW only), or use a new disc. Pioneer is not responsible for lost recordings, damaged discs or other losses in these cases. • See also Disc/content format playback compatibility on page 7 for detailed disc compatibility information. Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is generally the same as recording to regular single-layer discs; however, please note the following points: • When the recorder switches from the first layer to the second during recording a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc, a new title is automatically started on the new layer. • Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc. If the 99th title is being recorded when the layer is switched, recording will stop. • Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD+R DL disc. • You cannot play, record additional material to, edit or finalize a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc that has been recorded on but not yet finalized on another DVD recorder. 07 HDD is 999 and 99 respectively. No more recording is possible on the HDD after the maximum number of titles has been reached. • The maximum continuous recording time for one title is 12 hours. • It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure that the Input Line System setting (page 148) matches the TV line system of the source you’re recording. HDD Video mode compatibility When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see page 142). When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW is possible. When recording a bilingual broadcast, set which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup menu (see Bilingual Recording on page 139). When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off, high-speed copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW isn’t possible. However, both channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you can switch the audio on playback. About HDD recording Recorded audio Recording to the hard disk drive (HDD) is very flexible; you have the full choice of recording quality options, including manual mode, and of course you can record, erase and re-record as many times as you like. In all modes except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two channels in the Dolby Digital format. (The sound can be recorded in the Dolby Digital 5.1-channel format only when video with Dolby Digital 5.1-channel audio is copied from an HDD camcorder.) The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can store many hours of video on it, even using the higher quality recording modes. Important • The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that can be recorded on the When set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format. If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or 61 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 07 62 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Recording on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting (page 139) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel to record before recording starts. In other cases, both channels of a bilingual broadcast will be recorded and you can switch on playback. Restrictions on video recording You cannot record copy-protected video using this recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material is encountered during a recording, recording will pause automatically and an error message will be displayed on-screen. Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded to DVD-RAM or HDD, CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-R/-RW (see below). When recording a TV broadcast or through an external input, you can display copy control information on screen (see Displaying disc information on-screen on page 85). CPRM CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed for the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast programmes. CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media. This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that you can record copy-once broadcast programmes, but you cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be made on CPRMcompatible DVD-R (ver. 2.0/8x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the HDD. DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM. 62 En Recording equipment and copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying. You are advised to check carefully what constitutes lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyrighted material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners Switching between A.TV and D.TV tuners A.TV/D.TV • Press to switch between D.TV (digital) and A.TV (analog). Changing channels There are a number of ways to select analog and digital TV channels.1 Note that you can’t change the TV channel during playback, recording or during recording standby. CHANNEL • • CHANNEL +/– buttons Number buttons Note 1 • If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it. • While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 63 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Recording For example, to select channel 4 (digital channel D004), press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34 (digital channel D034), press 3, 4, ENTER.1 • CH +/– buttons on the front panel. • For D.TV channels only, you can also use the Channel List — see below. Tip • When changing terrestrial digital broadcast channels, channels with a low signal strength may result in a black screen being displayed. • For other channels, it may take a short while for the channel picture to appear, and/or for the channel number to appear. • In both of the above cases, some improvement may be possible by adjusting the antenna. Using the D.TV Channel List When in D.TV mode, you can call up the onscreen Channel List anytime by pressing ENTER. Use the / buttons to select a channel, then press ENTER to switch to that channel.2 D001 ************ D002 ************ 07 INFO • Press to display the channel banner for the current channel. D001 ************ Now ******************** Next ************* Wed.30.Apr 12:46 11:30 - 12:00 12:00 - 12:30 • Use the / buttons to display the channel banner for other channels. To switch to the displayed banner’s channel, press ENTER. • The channel banner displays the Subtitles ( ) and Teletext/MHEG ( ) icon if they apply to the selected channel.3 • To see more detailed channel information, press INFO again.4 Now ************************ 11:30 - 12:00 More... Use the / buttons to display information about previous and following programmes. Use the / buttons to see information about other channels. • If there is still more information to be displayed, More ... is displayed; press the BLUE button to see the extra information. • To hide the channel banner, press RETURN/EXIT. D003 ****** D004 ************ Changing D.TV audio languages D005 **** D006 ****** Displaying a channel banner A channel banner shows programme titles, start and end times of the current programme and other channel information. The information is updated every minute. AUDIO • Press to display the current audio language. Press repeatedly to change it to other available languages. Changing D.TV subtitle languages SUBTITLE • Press to display the current subtitle language. Press repeatedly to change it to other available languages. Note 1 Analog channel presets are numbered 1 to 99; digital channel presets are numbered D001 to D999. 2 • If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it. • While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for three minutes. 3 Due to inaccurate information provided by the broadcaster, some icons may occasionally be present or absent in error. 4 Not all channels supply more detailed information. 63 En 07 Recording.fm 64 ページ 2008年3月6日 木曜日 午前11時9分 Recording 07 Using the MHEG application (UK only) Some stations bring you programmes with the MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Expert Group) application encoded, letting you experience D.TV interactively.1 The channel banner displays an icon ( ) to indicate that the MHEG application can be run. • If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on page 138) is set to NICAM and you are watching a NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM and Regular (non-NICAM) audio. NICAM Regular • If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also select the language. TEXT • Press to start the MHEG application. • You can also use any of the colour buttons. • Press TEXT to quit the MHEG application. NICAM A Regular NICAM B NICAM A+B • You can also select the language for a non-NICAM bilingual broadcast. A (L) B (R) A + B (L+R) Viewing Teletext (European countries except the UK) You can view the Teletext that comes simultaneously with certain programmes. • TEXT Press to display the Teletext. • You can also use any of the colour buttons. • Press the TEXT button again to hide the Teletext screen. Changing A.TV audio channels You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or external input signal. AUDIO • Press to change the audio type. The current audio channel is displayed on-screen. 64 En • When watching a recording made from an external input with Bilingual recording selected (see External Audio on page 138), you can switch the audio channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R). L R L+R Note • When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), to DVD+R/ +RW, or on the LPCM setting, only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 139). Note 1 If you start recording while the MHEG application is running, the MHEG application screen will also be recorded. To avoid this, quit the application first, then start recording. It is not possible to start the MHEG application while recording is in progress. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 65 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Recording Switching between TV and DVD When the recorder is stopped or recording you can choose whether to have the audio/ video from the built-in TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’), or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV mode’). During playback or when a menu is being displayed on-screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting. Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature. TV/DVD Switch between TV mode and DVD mode. Setting the picture quality/ recording time DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard settings available, which allow you to choose a balance between picture quality and recording time. When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual Recording on page 141), a further option will be available (MN1 to MN32, LPCM, or XP+ (a super-high quality HDD recording mode that features a transfer rate of around 15 Mbps) depending on what you set). 07 When recording to DVD+R/+RW, SLP is the longest recording time available. If you select SEP or MN1 to MN3, the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP. REC MODE • Press repeatedly to select the recording quality. • XP – High quality setting, gives about one hour of recording time on a DVD disc. • SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, used for most applications, gives about two hours of recording time on a DVD. • LP (Long Play) – Lower video quality than SP, but doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four hours. • EP (Extended Play) – Lower quality than LP, but gives about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc. • SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD disc. • SEP (Super Extended Play) – Lowest video quality but gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD disc. • MN1 to MN32/LPCM1/XP+2 – Manual/ Linear PCM/XP+ (available only when manual recording is on). The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and shown on-screen together with the recording time for a blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the approximate remaining recording time for that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting (see On Screen Display on page 145) is Off then this information is not displayed.) When recording to DVD, MN32 is the highest recording quality available. If you select XP+, the recording mode will automatically revert to MN32. Note 1 Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 139). 2 Applicable only to HDD recording. (If this setting is used when recording to DVD, MN32 is used.) When copied to DVD, XP+ recordings are always copied in real time. 65 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 07 66 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Recording Basic recording from the TV DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the channel to record, choosing whether to record to the HDD or a DVD and selecting the recording quality. HDD DVD 1 Select the HDD or DVD for recording. • If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if you load a new blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc). • If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R or a Video mode DVD-RW, you must initialize it before proceeding (see Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 73). A.TV/D.TV 2 Press to switch between D.TV (digital) and A.TV (analog). CHANNEL 3 Select a TV channel to record. The front panel display shows the channel number, or channel name if it’s available: A.TV Channel preset • While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the number buttons on the remote to select the channel (For channel 24, press 2, 4 then ENTER). • If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the CH +/– buttons on the front panel to select the channel number. REC MODE 4 Set the picture quality/recording time. • See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 65 for detailed instructions. 66 En Note 1 Except during Chase Play. AUDIO 5 If you’re recording from the A.TV tuner, select the audio channel to record. See Changing A.TV audio channels on page 64 for more on this. • When recording in VR mode (DVD) or with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (HDD), if a broadcast is bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to LPCM, in which case you do need to select the audio channel before recording. AUDIO 6 If you’re recording from the D.TV tuner, select the audio language to record. • You may also be able to set which subtitle language to record; use SUBTITLE to select. • Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be changed during the recording of a digital broadcast. REC 7 Start recording. If you want to set a recording end time, press the REC button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder automatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed. • To cancel the set recording time, press REC. • If you want to pause recording at any time1, press PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording (If recording to the HDD, DVD-RAM or DVD-R/-RW (VR mode), a new chapter is started after recording restarts). DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 67 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Recording STOP REC 8 Press to stop recording. • If you set the recording time in the previous step, you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing F STOP REC. • Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of HDD recording (whichever is sooner). Tip • During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop through function. During recording, press the front panel CH + button to switch to SCART THRU (loop through on), or CH – to switch to SCART NORM (loop through off). Loop through is automatically reset to off after recording has finished. Note that you can’t switch loop through on if recording from the AV1 (RGB)-TV connector. Pause Live TV HDD The Pause Live TV feature lets you effectively pause a TV programme you’re watching. When you’re ready to resume watching, just press the PLAY button. Setting up for Pause Live TV You can use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Link-compatible TV connected using a SCART cable (see TV tuner setup for Pause Live TV below), or using this recorder’s internal tuner (see Using the recorder’s internal tuner for Pause Live TV on page 68). 07 TV tuner setup for Pause Live TV To use this feature with an external TV tuner, the recorder must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable, and the AV. Link setting (page 145) should be set to This Recorder Only.1 See also Pause Live TV on page 146 for more on this. In order to use Pause Live TV, make the following connections and settings. • Pause Live TV will not work as expected when watching TV via an external component such as a VCR or digital tuner. It only works with the channel selected on the TV. Important • Pause Live TV only works with the built-in A.TV (analog) tuner. It does not work with the D.TV tuner or the external inputs. Make sure the Auto Channel Setting is set to Download from TV (see Auto Channel Setting on page 136). 1 Connect this recorder to your TV with a SCART cable. 2 Press HOME MENU. 3 Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Options2’ > ‘Pause Live TV’ > ‘TV’s Tuner’. 4 Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Analog Tuner’ > ‘Auto Channel Setting’ > ‘Download from TV’. • If the Download from TV option appears grayed out, check the connections to your TV and try again. • Depending on your TV, you might have to switch off and unplug it for a few moments before plugging it back in and switching it on again. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions. Note 1 • Not all TVs support this feature. Check the instructions that came with your TV if you are unsure. • This feature will not work unless your TV is compatible with AV Link. See the operating instructions that came with your TV if you’re unsure about your TV’s compatibility with this feature. 67 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 07 68 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Recording Using the recorder’s internal tuner for Pause Live TV If you haven’t connected to your TV using a SCART cable (or your TV is not compatible with AV Link) you can use the recorder’s internal tuner for the Pause Live TV. STOP REC 3 Press to stop the recording. The operation is slightly different depending on the viewing source. See the Operation table below for details. 1 Press HOME MENU. 2 Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Options2’ > ‘Pause Live TV’ > ‘Recorder’s Tuner’. See Pause Live TV on page 146 to do this. You can record the channel selected on the recorder. Using Pause Live TV PAUSE LIVE TV 1 Start recording the current TV channel. Recording continues with playback paused. • Note that it may take up to 10 seconds for recording to start. PLAY 2 Press to start playback. You can also use the scan buttons (/ ), pause ( PAUSE) and stop ( STOP) — all without affecting the recording. Tip • When the Pause Live TV setting (see page 146) is set to TV’s Tuner, you can press PAUSE LIVE TV while the recorder is in standby to switch on and immediately start recording. When set to Recorder’s Tuner, it is not possible to use the Pause Live TV feature from standby. • After pressing PAUSE LIVE TV, it will take at least 10 seconds for the picture to change (during this time, all controls except the power button are inoperative). (Note that startup from standby is not possible if you have selected Recorder’s Tuner in Pause Live TV on page 146.) • Please note that you can’t record from another component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART cable to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector using the Pause Live TV feature. Operation table Viewing source TV built-in analog tuner 68 En TV/DVD Pause Live TV mode of DVR source function button DVR TV – Condition Pause Live TV Preset channel of DVR and TV are matched after downloading from TV. Direct TV recording*1 Preset channel of DVR and TV are NOT matched after downloading from TV. Record TV programme that you’re watching. TV built-in digital tuner TV – Direct TV recording*1 Preset channel info. in D.TV cannot be shared by DVR even after Download from TV. Record TV programme that you’re watching. External input of TV TV – Direct TV recording*1 Record TV programme that you’re watching. DVR built-in analog tuner DVD DVR built-in Pause Live TV analog tuner DVR built-in digital tuner DVD DVR built-in Pause Live TV digital tuner *1 No Chase Play! Warning if you change input this will stop the recording. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 69 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Recording About timer recordings DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD Using the timer recording features you can program up to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer recording programmes can be set to record just once, every day, or every week. You can set the recording quality for your timer recording in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if recording to the HDD). You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to automatically replace the previous timer recording with the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the previous recording made on that timer programme will be replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have watched it yet or not. You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set (see Optimized Rec on page 141 for more on this). Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the recording, the Recovery Recording feature will automatically record the programme to the HDD for you. This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video Programming System) and PDC (Programme Delivery Control) systems used by many analog TV stations to ensure that a timer recording catches the whole programme even when the programme is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer programmes can be set with VPS/PDC on. 07 Important • A timer recording can’t be set if there are already 32 timer programmes waiting to be recorded. • Timer recording will not start if: – The recorder is already recording. – A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized. • Timer recording will start when the operation preventing timer recording has finished. • When the front panel display is set to ON, the timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel display when the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording) there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not recordable). • Approximately two minutes before a timer recording is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use some functions. • The maximum length for timer recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title (HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12 hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there will be a break in the recording of a few seconds between titles. • When a scheduled recording finishes, this unit’s power is not turned off if the power for the Flat Screen TV is on. If you want this unit’s power to turn off after a timer recording finishes, set the HDMI Control to Off (page 145). • If you set the timer recording to use VPS/ PDC, set this unit’s HDMI Control to Off (page 145). • VPS/PDC works only with analog stations; it does not work with digital TV stations. 69 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 70 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Recording 07 • VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in your country/area. Check with the stations for compatibility. • The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the morning are used by the GUIDE Plus+ system to download programme information. During these times, VPS/ PDC may not work reliably; leave VPS/ PDC off if you set a timer recording for these times. • Timer recordings with VPS/PDC set to On are not performed for the period between 20 minutes before the start time of timer recordings for which EPG Link is set to On until the such recordings are completed (page 56). • If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programmes that are programmed to start at the same time, then the programme that actually starts first takes priority. Extending a timer recording in progress You can extend a timer recording beyond the programmed end time. This can be useful if a broadcast programme overruns, for example. Cancelling or extending the timer Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording (child lock) You can make all the front panel and remote control buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is useful when you set a timer recording and want to make sure that the timer settings are not changed before recording has finished. STANDBY/ON If the recorder is on, switch it 1 into standby. 2 [Front panel] Press and hold for three seconds to lock the controls. The front panel display briefly shows LOCKED. If any buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCKED is briefly displayed again. • To unlock the recorder, press and hold (Stop) on the front panel (while the recorder is stopped) for three seconds until the display shows UNLOCKED. • Even if you make child lock settings, this unit can still be controlled by the remote of a connected Flat Screen TV. If you do not want this unit to be able to be controlled by another component when you have set a child lock, turn this unit’s HDMI Control to Off (page 145). REC 1 Press and hold for three seconds during a timer recording. Recording continues, but the timer indicator disappears from the front panel display indicating that the timer has been cancelled. REC 2 Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30 minute blocks. Stopping a timer recording STOP REC 1 2 70 En Press during a timer recording. ENTER Select ‘Yes’ to confirm. Timer recording FAQ Frequently Asked Questions • Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start recording! Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on page 128), and that there are fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD. • The recorder won’t let me enter a timer programme! Why not? You can’t enter a timer programme if the clock isn’t set. 07 Recording.fm 71 ページ 2008年3月6日 木曜日 午前11時11分 Recording • What happens when two or more timer programmes overlap? Basically, the programme with the earlier recording start time has priority. However, the recorder will start recording the programme with the later start time after the earlier programme is finished. If schedule to record two programmes have the same times (but different channels, for example), then only one of the two programmes will be recorded. In this event you should cancel the scheduled recording of the lesser important programme. If one of the overlapping programmes is a regular timer programme, you may choose ‘Cancel Once’ in order to avoid having it overlap with a separately scheduled programme (see Skipping a regular timer programme on page 58). Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play) 07 DISC NAVIGATOR • Press during recording to select another title to play. You can use all the usual playback controls, such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip. • To stop playback, press STOP (recording will continue). • To stop recording, press F STOP REC (playback will continue). • During recording or in timer recording standby, you can’t play an HDD title, DVD, DivX title or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match the TV line system of the disc/DivX title/HDD title (see also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 148). Also, during simultaneous recording and playback, if the TV line system of the playback track/title changes then playback will automatically stop. Recording from an external component HDD Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is still in progress from the start, without having to wait until the recording has finished (i.e., playback is ‘chasing’ the recording). In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording in progress. You can watch anything else already on the HDD (or on a DVD if you’re recording to the HDD) by selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on page 79). Chase Play is not possible when DV is the recording input. PLAY • Press during recording to start playback from the beginning of the current recording1. DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD You can record from an external component, such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s external inputs. 1 Make sure that the component you want to record from is connected properly to the HDD/DVD recorder. See Chapter 2 (page 14) for connection options. INPUT SELECT 2 Press repeatedly to select one of the external inputs to record from. The current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel display: • AV2/L1 – Input 12 • L2 – Input 2 (front panel) • L3 – Input 3 Note 1 You can’t start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn’t work while copying or backing up. 2 This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 138). 71 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 72 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Recording 07 Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 138). • If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched), adjust on the source component or your TV before recording. • To watch video coming in via the DV input (front panel), select DV/HDD-Cam > DV Video Playback from the Home Menu (see also Playing from a DV camcorder on page 86). 3 REC MODE Set the recording quality. • See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 65 for detailed information. HDD 4 recording. DVD Select the HDD or DVD for REC 5 Press to start recording. If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 62 for more details. Playing your recordings on other DVD players DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R discs. A number of players (including many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Most players will not play VR mode DVD-R discs, although some DVD-ROM drives and DVD recorders may be able to (finalization might be necessary). DVD-RAM discs can only be played on DVD-RAM compatible players. Check the manual that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will play. 72 En When you finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R disc, a title menu is created from which you can select titles when you play the disc. There are a number of different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc. All the title menus are navigated in the usual way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then using the /// followed by ENTER to select titles and start playback. Finalizing a disc DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings on the disc so that it can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.1 Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc Name on page 128 before starting the steps below. DVD+RW discs don’t generally need finalizing. However, if you want a title menu to appear when you play the disc, then you will need to finalize. When using a DVD+RW, you can still record and edit even after finalizing, although the title menu will disappear if you do so. Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu. Important • Once you’ve finalized a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R disc, you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc. However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe ‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 129 for how to do this. • A VR mode DVD-R/-RW (excluding DVD-R DL) disc can still be recorded and Note 1 If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 148 for how to change the recorder’s setting. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 73 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Recording 07 edited on this recorder even after finalizing. • DVD-R DL (Video mode) discs and DVD+R DL discs must be finalized in order to play in other recorders/players. Note however that some recorders/ players will not play even finalized duallayer discs. 1 Load the disc you want to finalize. Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding. HOME MENU 2 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 3 Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’. ENTER 4 Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Finalize’ > ‘Next Screen’. Disc Setup Basic Finalize Next Screen Initialize Finalize Undo Finalize Start • Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on this recorder. 6 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc. During finalization: • If the finalization process of a DVD-R/ -RW disc is going to take more than around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before completion, the option to cancel disappears. • You can’t cancel the finalization of a DVD+R/+RW disc. • How long finalization takes depends on the type of disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can take up to one hour to finalize. DVD-R/ -RW (Video mode) and DVD+R/+RW discs can take up to 20 minutes. Optimize HDD Initializing recordable DVD discs ENTER 5 For DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R/+RW discs only, select a title menu style, then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to cancel. The menu you select will be the one that appears when the ‘top menu’ (or ‘menu’ for a DVD+R/+RW) is selected on any DVD player. Finalize DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either Video mode recording or VR mode recording.1 When you first load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder initializes it for recording automatically. By default, blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 74 if you want to change the default to Video mode. DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode recording, you must initialize it before recording anything on the disc. Note 1 If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or initialize it for Video mode recording. 73 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 74 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Recording 07 DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized in order to erase the contents of the disc. Important • Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want to keep! • You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in a different format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD recorder. • Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can’t re-initialize a DVD-R back to Video mode. DVD-RW Auto Initialize DVD-RW • Default setting: VR Mode Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired initialization mode before inserting a disc. HOME MENU 1 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 2 Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’. ENTER 3 Select ‘Basic’>’DVD-RW Auto Init.’, then ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Video Mode’. HOME MENU 1 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 2 Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’. ENTER 3 Select ‘Initialize’ > ‘Video Mode’, ‘VR Mode’ or ‘Initialize DVD+RW’. Disc Setup Basic VR Mode Start Initialize Video Mode Start Finalize Initialize DVD+RW Start Optimize HDD ENTER 4 Select ‘Start’. It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc (except DVD-RAM discs, which can take up to an hour). Initializing Disc Pr 1 1 min left 74 En Disc Setup Basic Input Disc Name VR Mode Initialize Lock Disc Video Mode Finalize DVD-RW Auto Init. Optimize HDD DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 75 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playback 08 Chapter 8 Playback Introduction Most of the features described in this chapter make use of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the cursor buttons and ENTER. To go back one level from any screen, use the RETURN/EXIT button. Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons do what. Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/DivX discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. • Many functions are not available when a Video CD is playing in PBC mode. Start playback from the Disc Navigator screen for non-PBC playback (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 80). • For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer) on page 117. playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction. HDD DVD 1 Select the HDD or DVD for playback. • If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3 below. OPEN/CLOSE 2 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). • If you want to play a DTS Audio CD, please first read the note on page 77. PLAY 3 Basic playback ALL This section shows you how to use your recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of video from the HDD. Start playback. • If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc menu may appear when you start playback. Use the /// buttons, number buttons, and ENTER to navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for Video CD menus. • When playing video from the HDD, playback will automatically stop after the end of a title is reached. • There may be a slight pause when playback switches from the first to the second layer of a dual-layer disc. • See the following sections for more details on playing specific kinds of discs. STOP Important • Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means any kind of playable or recordable DVD. If a function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified. • Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and DVD+RW discs don’t allow certain 4 Press to stop playback. 5 When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject the disc and switch the recorder back into standby. 75 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 08 76 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playback Playing DVD discs While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. The table below shows the basic playback controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs. Press to start playback. If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from the place last stopped. PLAY STOP PAUSE Press to stop playback. You can resume playback from the same point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP again to cancel the resume function.) DISC NAVIGATOR MENU TOP MENU Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-Video disc menus; press ENTER to select items. Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused. Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. PREV NEXT Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.) DVD+R/DVD+RW only: PREV may not always skip to the previous title. RETURN ENTER CM BACK 76 En CM SKIP (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction. Press to return to the previous level of a DVD-Video disc menu. EXIT Playing from the HDD The table below shows the basic playback controls when playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD). Press to start playback. If RESUME is displayed onscreen, playback starts from the place last stopped. Playback automatically stops after the end of a title is reached. PLAY Except VR mode: During playback, enter a chapter number then press ENTER to skip directly to that chapter within the currently playing title. On some discs, you can also use the number buttons to select numbered items in the disc menu. VR mode only: During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER. All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again. Press to display the menu of a DVD-Video disc. (DVD+R/+RW discs finalized on this recorder will display the Disc Navigator. Press MENU to display the disc menu.) STOP PAUSE Press to stop playback. You can resume playback from the same point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP again to cancel the resume function.) Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused. Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 77 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playback PREV NEXT Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.) During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER to skip directly to that title. Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again. ENTER CM BACK CM SKIP 08 PREV NEXT Playing Video CDs/Super VCDs The table below shows the basic playback controls for Video CDs/Super VCDs. Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short) menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you load them and display a menu on-screen from where you can select what to watch.2 (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction. Press to start playback. Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. PLAY While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction. STOP Playing Audio CDs and WMA/MP3 discs PAUSE The table below shows the basic playback controls for Audio CDs1, and WMA/MP3 files. Press to start playback. PLAY STOP PAUSE Press to stop playback. Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused. Press to skip to previous/next track. Press to stop playback. Video CD only: You can resume playback from the same point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP again to cancel the resume function.) Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused. Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. PREV NEXT Press to skip to previous/next track. When a PBC menu is displayed, press to display the previous/ next page. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.) Press to start scanning. Press again to increase the scanning speed. (There are two scan speeds; the current scan speed is shown on-screen.) Note 1 If you want to play a DTS Audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 84). 2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and programme play are not available. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 80). 77 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 08 78 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playback ENTER CM BACK CM SKIP During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again. While a PBC menu screen is displayed, use to select numbered menu items. EXIT The table below shows the basic playback controls for DivX video files. Press to start playback. PLAY STOP Video CD in non-PBC mode only: (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of two hours in either direction. While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed (forward only). While paused, press to advance a single frame (forward only). RETURN Playing DivX video files PAUSE PREV NEXT Press to skip to previous/next title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/– buttons.) While paused, press to advance one frame. Press and hold to start slow motion playback (press repeatedly to change the slow motion play speed). Press to display the disc menu of a Video CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode. SUBTITLE En Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused. Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. AUDIO 78 Press to stop playback. Press to display the playback audio type; press repeatedly to change the playback audio type. Press to display subtitle information; press repeatedly to change subtitles. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 79 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playback 08 Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc and start playback. Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view information on titles. See also Editing on page 90 for more on editing recordable discs. 1 HDD DVD 4 ENTER Play the highlighted title. • Press , then you can also select Play from the command menu panel. Changing the display style of the Disc Navigator You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the same time. 1 Display the view options panel. The view options panel Select the HDD or DVD. Disc Navigator (HDD) DISC NAVIGATOR 2 Style Open the Disc Navigator. 4 Titles 4 Titles Sort order Disc Navigator (HDD) 23:00 FRI Pr 4 SP 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch 9 20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 8 22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 7 19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Recent first 2h00m(1.0G) All Genres MENU 22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 7 19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP 2h00m(1.0G) HDD SP Remain 30h30m MENU 1h00m(1.0G) 1h00m(1.0G) 1h00m(1.0G) 1h00m(1.0G) • You can also access the Disc Navigator from the Home Menu. 3 3 All Genres All Genres SP SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles HDD SP Remain 30h30m Genre 10Titles 23:00 FRI Pr 4 SP 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2ch 2 Recent first NEW first 10Titles 101 11 Browse the list of titles. • Use the PREV/ NEXT buttons to display the previous/next page of titles. • To change the thumbnail picture displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on page 94. • For HDD recordings, you should be able to see a thumbnail title digest. If it doesn’t display, set Set Preview to Normal. See Set Preview on page 145. ENTER 2 Choose ‘Style’, ‘Sort order’ or ‘Genre’, then press ENTER to see the available view options. • Style – Select four or eight titles per screen view • Sort order – Sort by date (most recent first), unwatched first, title name or recording date (oldest first) • Genre – Display all genres or just a selected genre ENTER 3 Choose a view option, then press ENTER. The title list display is updated according to the new display preferences. • Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are recently recorded titles that haven’t yet been played. 79 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 80 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playback 08 • For instructions on playing Audio CD and WMA/MP3 discs, see Playing and copying music (Jukebox) on page 111. Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs DVD-Video Video CD Super VCD 1 DVD Scanning discs Select DVD. ALL HOME MENU 2 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 3 Select ‘Disc Navigator’. Alternatively, for a Video CD or Super VCD, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen. ENTER 4 Select what you want to play. Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly different, but they are all navigated in the same way. The screen below shows a Video CD. Navigate to the track/chapter/title that you want to play. Track (01-99) Track01 Track02 Track03 Track04 Track05 Track06 Track07 Track08 Tip • For instructions on playing DivX files, see Playing and copying DivX files (PC VIDEO) on page 108. En 2 Press repeatedly to change the scanning speed. There are four scanning speeds available when playing HDD video, a DVD or a DivX title. Reverse playback is also possible with HDD and DVD-Video.2 There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc. PLAY 3 Resume normal playback. Playing in slow motion Total 0.50.50 Playback starts after you press ENTER. 80 1 During playback, start reverse or forward scanning. The scanning speed is shown on-screen. Track01 Disc Navigator Video CD You can scan discs at various speeds, forwards or backwards.1 DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in either direction, while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles can only be played forwards in slow motion. There is no sound when playing in slow motion. PAUSE 1 Pause playback. 2 Press and hold to start slow motion reverse or forward play. Note 1 • No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles. • No sound is output when scanning HDD videos, DVDs or DivX titles except in forward SCAN 1. • Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc. 2 Reverse playback may not be smooth. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 81 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playback 08 • Select Play Mode from the command menu for Audio CDs or WMA/MP3 files by pressing in the Jukebox (see Playing music from the Jukebox on page 113). • With DivX files, Play Mode can only be selected during playback. 3 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. One of four slow motion play speeds can be selected during playback. The current playback speed is indicated onscreen. PLAY 4 Resume normal playback. Frame advance/frame reverse DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc1 or the HDD frame-by-frame. With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles, you can only use frame advance. PAUSE 1 Pause playback. 2 Back up or advance one frame with each press. PLAY 3 Resume normal playback. Search Mode DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a specified point in a disc by time2 or by title/chapter/track number. ENTER 1 Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play Mode menu, then choose a search option. The available search options depend on the type of disc. 2 Enter a title/chapter/track number or a search time. Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme The Play Mode menu Time Search Title Search Chapter Search Input Time 0.01.00 ALL The Play Mode menu gives you access to search functions, repeat and programme play functions. HOME MENU • Select ‘Play Mode’ from the Home Menu. Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme Time Search Title Search Chapter Search Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0. Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and 30 seconds into the current track, press 2, 3, 0. Title/Chapter/Track Search:For example, for track 6, press 6. 3 ENTER Start playback. Note 1 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. 2 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input. 81 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 08 82 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playback A-B Repeat DVD HDD CD Video CD Super VCD DivX The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is played over and over.1 programme play to repeat the tracks/ chapters in the programme list (see Programme play below).2 ENTER • Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu, then choose a repeat play mode. Play Mode ENTER 1 During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu. ENTER 2 With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press at the point you want the loop to start. Play Mode Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme A (Loop Start) B (Loop End) Off Repeat Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Off Search Mode A-B Repeat Repeat Programme • To resume normal playback, select Repeat Off from the Repeat Play menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Programme play HDD DVD-Video ENTER 3 With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press at the point you want the loop to end. Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and plays the loop round and round. • When playing a DVD-Video, DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD+R/+RW, or from the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title. • To resume normal playback, select Off from the A-B Repeat menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed. Repeat play ALL There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together with 82 En CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 This feature lets you program the play order of titles/chapters3/albums/tracks on a disc or the HDD. ENTER 1 Select ‘Programme’ from the Play Mode menu, then ‘Input/Edit Programme’. The Input/Edit Programme screen varies according to the disc type. Below is the DVD input screen. Programme Step 01.001 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title Title Title Title (01-03) 01 02 03 Chapter(001-015) Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Chapter 005 Chapter 006 Chapter 007 Chapter 008 ENTER 2 Select a title, chapter, album or track for the current step in the programme list. Note 1 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is cancelled. 2 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is cancelled. 3 When playing a programme list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the programme list may be sometimes be played, depending on the disc. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 83 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playback After pressing ENTER to add the title/ chapter/album/track, the step number automatically moves down one. • To insert a step into the programme list, highlight the step number where you want to insert another step, then select a chapter/title/album/track as usual. After pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move down one. • To delete a step from the programme list, highlight the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR. 3 Repeat step 2 to build up a programme list. A programme list can contain up to 24 titles/ chapters/albums/tracks. PLAY 4 Play the programme list. Programme play remains active until you cancel programme play, erase the programme list, eject the disc or switch off the recorder. 08 • From the programme menu you can also: Start Programme Play – Starts playback of a saved programme list Cancel Programme Play – Turns off programme play, but does not erase the programme list Erase Programme List – Erases the programme list and turns off programme play Displaying and switching subtitles DVD-Video DivX Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback.1 Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle options. Tip SUBTITLE • To save your programme list and exit the programme edit screen without starting playback, press HOME MENU. • During programme play, press NEXT to skip to the next programme step. • To repeat play the programme list, select Repeat Programme from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see Repeat play on page 82). • Except CD, WMA/MP3: Press CLEAR during playback to switch off programme play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is displayed). Press while stopped to erase the programme list. • Select/change the subtitle language. The current subtitle language is shown onscreen and in the front panel display. • To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR. Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks DVD-Video DivX When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you can switch the soundtrack during playback.2 Note 1 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access. • To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 140. 2 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access. • To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 140. 83 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 08 84 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playback Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack options. HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM L+R – Both channels (default) AUDIO • Change the audio soundtrack. The current audio language is shown onscreen and in the front panel display. L – Left channel only R – Right channel only • The sound may drop out for a few seconds when switching soundtracks. • Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver on page 20 for connection details. CD Video CD WMA/MP3 Stereo – Stereo (default) 1/L – Left channel only 2/R – Right channel only Super VCD 1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1/Stereo (default) 1 L – Soundtrack 1/Left channel 1 R – Soundtrack 1/Right channel 2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2/Stereo Switching audio channels 2 L – Soundtrack 2/Left channel DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD CD 2 R – Soundtrack 2/Right channel Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 Switching camera angles HDD1 and VR mode content recorded For with bilingual audio, you can switch between left (L) channel, right (R) channel, or both (L+R).2 When playing Video CDs and Audio CDs you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as well as individual channels in each. DVD-Video Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more angles — check the disc box for details: it should be marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle scenes. When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you prefer — see Angle Indicator on page 143). AUDIO • Press repeatedly to display/ switch the audio channel. The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-screen. 84 En • ANGLE Switch the camera angle. • The angle number is displayed onscreen. • If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the new angle. Note 1 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 142). 2 When playing a bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 139) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 85 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playback 08 Displaying disc information on-screen You can display various on-screen information about the disc loaded or the HDD. Shows recording restrictions for the current channel programme Stop DVD-RW VR Original Disc Name HDD and removable disc activity display Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD and DVD button to switch between the two kinds of display. The example displays below show highspeed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback. Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) HDD Remain 10h35m Stop Hi-Speed Copy HDD DVD 0h08m left DVD-RW Video Remain –h––m Stop Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) HDD DVD-RW Video Remain 10h35m Chase Play Rec Remain 0h52m Stop Recording time Relative playback position Rem. 0h35m : Comedy shows ABC Pr 1 Stereo Copy Once DVD Mode Indicates copy-protected material Indicates a multi-angle scene DISPLAY • Display/change the on-screen information. • Press once to show the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the status of just the currently selected playback/ recording device (HDD or removable disc). • To hide the information display, press DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears. Resume XP (1h00m/DVD) Finalized Play DVD-R Video Title Name 3–2 0. 00. 15 Chapter Time 0. 00. 21 Chapter Total 0h01m52s 4.32Mbps ! : 21/11 Football match Indicates the data transfer rate Tip • See Switching camera angles on page 84 for more on multi-angle scene switching. • When using the simultaneous play and record feature, the display shows information for playback only. • During real-time copy, the copy source playback information is displayed. • The Video mode DVD-R/-RW displays become the same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized. • The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis is calculated based on a 12 cm/4.7 GB disc at the displayed record setting. • Recording and playback time of TV recording is approximately 0.1 % shorter than the actual time. This is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD. • The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time display when the disc is paused. • Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that the broadcast TV programme contains copy control information. 85 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 86 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and recording from a DV/HDD camcorder 09 Chapter 9 Playing and recording from a DV/HDD camcorder You can also play back and record video from a DV camcorder connected to the DV IN jack on the front panel of this recorder. It is also possible to connect an HDD camcorder to the recorder’s USB port and copy the images of the HDD camcorder to the recorder. Important • If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable, you cannot control the second unit from this one. • You can’t control this unit remotely from a component connected to the DV IN jack. Playing from a DV camcorder 1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack. 2 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you would like. See DV Input on page 139 for more on this. • Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 138). HOME MENU 3 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 4 Select ‘DV/HDD-Cam’ > ‘DV Video Playback’. 5 Start playback on the camcorder. Images from the camcorder should appear on your TV. 86 En • To record the incoming video, press HDD or DVD to select the HDD or a DVD for recording, then press REC. Press F STOP REC to finish recording. If there is no signal from the device connected to the DV jack, or the signal is copyprotected, recording will pause. It will automatically restart once there is a recordable signal. • The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will pause if the signal is interrupted during recording. • If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 62 for more details. Recording from a DV camcorder • The source signal must be DVC-SD format. • You can’t record date and time information from DV cassette. • During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will pause recording. Recording will restart automatically when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is more than two minutes of blank tape, this recorder will stop recording and the camcorder should stop (depending on the camcorder). Copying from a DV source Using the recorder’s remote, you can control both the camcorder and this recorder. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 87 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and recording from a DV/HDD camcorder Important • Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this recorder’s remote. • For best results when recording from a DV camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing the camcorder to the place you want to start recording from and setting the camcorder to play-pause. 8 Stop 1.02.22 Set the recording quality. • See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 65 for detailed information. 3 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you would like. See DV Input on page 139 for more on this. • Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 138). HOME MENU Display the Home Menu. ENTER 6 Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’. 7 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you want to start recording from. For best results, pause playback at the point from which you want to record. • Depending on your camcorder, you can use this recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the , , , , , and buttons. Pause Rec Stop Rec SP (2h00m/DVD) 32h45m • You can pause or stop the recording by selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display. You cannot control the camcorder from this remote control during recording. • If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder, the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be recorded. Use the pause button on your camcorder instead and recording will start immediately. • HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only: A chapter marker is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for example. • If you don’t want to see the DV recording screen during recording, press DISPLAY to hide it (press again to display). • While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN/EXIT button. REC MODE ENTER Stop Start Rec HDD Rem. 2 5 Select ‘DV/HDD-Cam’ > ‘Copy from a DV Source’. • DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape loaded. Select ‘Start Rec’. Control with these buttons 1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack. Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. 4 ENTER 09 DV Auto Copy DV Auto Copy allows you to make an exact copy of the contents of a DV source to the HDD or a DVD. 1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack. Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. 2 REC MODE Set the recording quality. • See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 65 for detailed information. 87 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 88 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and recording from a DV/HDD camcorder 09 3 From the Initial Setup menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you require. See DV Input on page 139 for more on this. • Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 138). HOME MENU 4 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 5 Select ‘DV/HDD-Cam’ > ‘DV Auto Copy’. • DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape loaded. • If a timer recording is scheduled to start, and in some other instances, the disc will not be finalized. Frequently Asked Questions • I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder! Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also make sure that what you’re trying to record is not copyprotected. If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder then switch back on. • There’s a picture, but no sound! Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on page 139) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.1 ENTER 6 Select ‘Record to Hard Disk Drive’ or ‘Record to DVD’. The DV tape is rewound to the beginning. Once it is rewound, the DV tape is played from the beginning and copied to either the HDD or a DVD. • If there is a gap of two minutes or more between recorded contents, the copying process is automatically stopped. • Once copying is finished, the DV tape is automatically rewound. • To cancel the copying process, press F STOP REC for more than three seconds. About automatic finalization If you use a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW disc for copying, it will automatically be finalized after copying is complete. • You can’t customize the background for DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW disc finalization. • No title names are assigned. • If you want to give the disc a name, please do so before you start the copy (see Input Disc Name on page 128). 88 En About DV Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 13941995, you can connect a DV camcorder to this recorder using a DV cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals. “i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks. • This recorder is only compatible with DVformat (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible. • You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at a time to this recorder. • You cannot control this recorder from external equipment connected via the DV IN jack. • It may not always be possible to control the connected camcorder via the DV IN jack. • DV camcorders can usually record audio as stereo 16-bit/48 kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/32 kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see DV Input on page 139). Note 1 If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 138). DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 89 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and recording from a DV/HDD camcorder • Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32 kHz or 48 kHz (not 44.1 kHz). • Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the source component pauses playback or plays an unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the source component, or the DV cable is disconnected. • The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output functionality. ENTER 5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. Select Yes and press ENTER. The screen shown below appears. Progress Bar All Movie Copy Copying Number of copied movies/Total movies 0 / 12 Remaining time (estimate) 1h 25m Copying from an HDD camcorder Important • For a description of the images that can be copied to the recorder, see Connecting an HDD camcorder on page 24. 1 Make sure your HDD camcorder is connected to the front panel USB port. Make the necessary settings for USB signal transfer on the HDD camcorder. For details, see the HDD camcorder’s operating instructions. HOME MENU 2 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 3 Select ‘DV/HDD-Cam’ > ‘HDDCam Copy’. ENTER 4 Select ‘Difference Copy’ or ‘All Movie Copy’. • When Difference Copy is selected, only images that have never been copied to the recorder are copied. Images that have already been copied are not copied, even if they have been deleted from the recorder’s HDD. • When All Movie Copy is selected, all the images on the HDD camcorder are copied. 09 Exit • To cancel copying press ENTER. • No other recorder operation is possible during copying. • The timer recording operation does not function during copying. Note • Images taken on the same date are copied as a single title. • Chapter markers are inserted at the positions where shooting started. Note that chapters that have been created automatically cannot be combined with other chapters. • The maximum number of chapters per title is 99. If 100 or more scenes are taken on a single day, the chapter numbers over 99 are stored in an extra file. • The maximum length of one title is 12 hours. Videos for which the shooting start to end time is over 12 hours cannot be copied. • Copied titles are named “USB (date of shooting)”. 89 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 10 90 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Editing Chapter 10 Editing Editing options The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types. HDD DVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD+R/+RW DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM (VR mode) Original Play List Create (page 92) Play (page 92) Erase (page 92) Edit > Title Name (page 93) Edit > Set Thumbnail (page 94) Edit > Erase Section (page 94) Edit > Divide (page 95) Edit > Chapter Edit (page 96) Edit > Set Genre (page 97) Edit > Lock (page 97) Edit > Combine (page 97) Genre Name (page 98) Multi-Mode (page 98) *1 DVD-R/-RW only En Edit > Move (page 97) Undo (page 99) 90 *1 *1 DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 91 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Editing 10 The Disc Navigator screen • The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) discs, DVD+R/ +RW and DVD-RAM, as well as video content on the hard disk drive. • • HDD 1 DVD Select the HDD or DVD. DISC NAVIGATOR 2 Display the Disc Navigator screen. Playback will automatically stop when you do this. • The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home Menu. View options panel Title list Disc Navigator (HDD) 101 9 Recent first • Selected title SP 20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 2h00m(1.0G) 8 22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 7 19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP All Genres Available recording time 10Titles 23:00 FRI Pr 4 SP 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles MENU 1h00m(1.0G) HDD SP Remain 30h30m Title thumbnail 1h00m(1.0G) Title Command information menu panel NEXT When in the title list, press to display the previous/next page if there are more titles than can be displayed. DISPLAY Press to change the title information displayed in the title list. HDD DVD Press to switch between the HDD and DVD Disc Navigator screens. • If you are editing a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc you can display the Play List by selecting Play List from the view options panel (press , then select Play List from the view options, then Play List). Important • Titles that have been recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank thumbnail image. See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 148. • During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a mark. These titles were recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be played. PREV Disc Navigator (DVD) 101 Style 4 Titles 4 Titles PlayList Original Original 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon 7:00PM SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 9 20:00 FRI 3/12 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 2h00m(1.0G) MENU DISC NAVIGATOR 3 Press to exit the Disc Navigator. Editing accuracy Some editing commands ask you whether you want to keep Video mode compatibility or frame accuracy (Video Mode Compatible Editing or Frame Accurate Editing). Frame Accurate Editing is very precise. The edit point is accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use the high-speed copy function to make a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Video Mode Compatible Editing is less precise. The edit point you choose will only be accurate to within one-half to one second. On the other hand, these edit points will be preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Press to display the command menu panel. Use the / and ENTER buttons to navigate the menus. 91 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 10 92 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Editing HDD genres The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize your HDD video content you can assign different genres to titles. There are 20 genres in total, including five user-definable ones that you can name as you like. 1 play. Highlight the title you want to ENTER 2 Select ‘Play’ from the command menu panel. Playback of the title you selected starts. Disc Navigator (HDD) Create 101 DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only Before you can use this command, make sure that the Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the left. 1 panel. Display the command menu Disc Navigator (DVD) 0Titles No title Play Erase 2h00m(1.0G) Edit Play List 9 20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPEdit 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 8 22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SP 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 7 19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Recent first 2h00m(1.0G) Genre Name All Genres HDD SP Remain 30h30m 1h00m(1.0G) Multi-Mode 1h00m(1.0G) Erase DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD The command menu panel 4 Titles Erase 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it. 10Titles 23:00 FRI Pr 4 SP 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP Play 11/29Mon 7:00PM SP 2h00m(1.0G) Create Undo 1h00m(1.0G) DVD VR Mode Remain 0h30m Use this function to erase unwanted titles. When you erase titles from the HDD, Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW or DVD-RAM, the available recording space increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a DVD-RW (Video mode) or DVD+RW disc increases the available recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.1 Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R (VR mode or Video mode) or DVD+R, will not result in any more free space on the disc. ENTER 2 Select ‘Create’ from the command menu panel. 1 erase. Highlight the title you want to ENTER 3 Select an original title to add to the Play List. Repeat these three steps to add as many titles as necessary to the Play List. Play ENTER 2 Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu panel. ENTER 3 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD Use this function to start playback of a title. 92 En Note 1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 93 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Editing 10 Tip • You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER. Title Name DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long for VR mode, DVD-RAM and HDD recordings, and up to 40 characters for Video mode recordings and DVD+R/+RW discs. 1 Highlight the title you want to name (or rename). ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Title Name’ from the command menu panel. 3 title. ENTER Input a name for the selected • For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set. ENTER 4 Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen. • To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN/EXIT. Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts that you can use to input characters in the name input screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the characters shown. If you want to enter two characters in succession that are both on the same button (for example a P and an R), press to advance the cursor one space manually between inputting the two characters. Key Characters Key Characters 1 .,’?!–&1 6 mno6öôòó øñ 2 abc2äàáâã æç 7 pqrs7$ 3 def3èéëê 8 tuv8üùûú 4 ghi4îïìí¡ 9 wxyz9 5 jkl5£ 0 0 [cursor back] [cursor forward] Input Title Name 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ; AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I # DN O OOO 0 1 2 3 4 5 + – /@ [ c £ \ § 2 3 ´ µ¶ · OK Clear O ø ß$% = > _ & ± { _| } ~ ¡ – ® ˚ 1 3 /2 /4 ¿ ` UUUUY 6 7 8 9 < ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ¨ © a– << ¬ ¸ 1 –o 1/4 << CAPS small ÿ/ß *1 Space • A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the / buttons to change the cursor position. • Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons ( PREV/ NEXT). • You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name). For other remote control key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name below. / [change case] CLEAR *1 <space> + ~ [clear character] [finish name input] ()_/:;”`^@#∗%¥|+= {}[]<> lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß 93 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 10 94 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Editing Using a USB keyboard to enter a name Using a USB keyboard connected to this recorder makes entering names very quick and convenient.1 When in USB keyboard input mode, a USB icon ( ) appears in the lower-left of the screen.2 Other than the standard alpha-numeric keys, use the following keys when entering names: The thumbnail setting screen appears and the playback starts from the beginning of the title. 3 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set. Set Thumbnail (HDD) 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP Key Function 10-1 00.00.09.15 Play Pause Select CAPS F2 Select small delete Delete character at the current cursor position back space Delete the character at the previous cursor position esc 2h00m Change the cursor position F1 enter Rec. time Enter the name Exit the input screen Set Thumbnail OK OK Exit Exit You can also use the chapter and time search features (press the MENU button), and the CM SKIP and CM BACK buttons. ENTER 4 screen. Select ‘Exit’ to return to the Edit Erase Section HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV. HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in that title. 1 Highlight the title containing the section you want to erase. ENTER 1 Highlight the title you want to change the thumbnail picture for. 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Erase Section’ from the command menu panel. ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Thumbnail’ from the command menu panel. 94 En Note 1 • It’s possible that some USB keyboards will not work exactly as expected when connected to this recorder. See also Connecting a USB device on page 24 for more connection information. • Certain keyboards may not be able to correctly input all characters. 2 If you use the remote control to enter a name when in the USB keyboard input mode, the recorder will automatically switch to remote control input mode. Press any key on the USB keyboard to return to USB keyboard input mode. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 95 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Editing 10 Divide 3 edit. ENTER HDD only: Select the type of HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be recombined into one again. HDD/DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. 1 divide. Video Mode Compatible Editing Highlight the title you want to Frame Accurate Editing ENTER • For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 91. 4 Highlight ‘From’ then use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find the start of the section to erase, then press ENTER. The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker shows the start of the section. 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Divide’ from the command menu panel. 3 HDD only: Select the type of edit. HDD/DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing Erase Section (HDD) 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP Rec. time 2h00m 10-1 00.00.09.15 Play Pause • For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 91. 4 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find the place you want to divide the title. From To Exit Divide Title (HDD) 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP Rec. time 2h00m ENTER 5 Highlight ‘To’ then, in the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then press ENTER. After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red. ENTER 6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look. • When editing VR mode Original content, you may not be able to erase very short sections (less than five seconds). 10–1 00.00.09.15 Play Pause Divide Cancel ENTER 5 Press to divide the title at the current playback position. ENTER 6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. ! Divided titles cannot be combined. OK? Yes No 95 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 10 96 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Editing Chapter Edit DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, combining and dividing. 1 Highlight the title that contains the chapters you want to edit. ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Chapter Edit’ from the command menu panel. You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc or 99 chapters per HDD title). • Erase1/Move2 – Erase or move chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER. Select whether you want to erase or move the chapter. Move command only: Select the destination for the chapter, and press ENTER. Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) 3 edit. ENTER 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Erase 1h00m Rec. time Move 0h01m Chapter Cancel HDD only: Select the type of 001 002 003 004 005 HDD/DVD RECORDER Please select the type of editing. Video Mode Compatible Editing is Exit Divide Erase/Move Combine recommended for compatibility with high-speed copying. Video Mode Compatible Editing Frame Accurate Editing • For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 91. 4 Select the command you want: • Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter, then press ENTER. • Combine3 – Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER. Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Rec. time 1 2 3 1h00m 4 5 Exit Divide Erase/Move Combine Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List) 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Rec. time Chapters 1h00m 5 ENTER 5 Select ‘Exit’ to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen. 0.00.00 1–1 Play Exit Divide Erase/Move Combine 96 En Note 1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long. 2 VR mode Play List only. 3 The following chapters cannot be combined: •Two chapters that are left after a chapter is divided into three and the middle chapter is erased. •A chapter that is created automatically as a result of copying from an HDD camcorder. •A chapter of a title recorded in a disc that has been created or edited with other equipment (this type of chapter is sometimes combinable depending on the equipment used in creation or editing). 10 Editing.fm 97 ページ 2008年3月6日 木曜日 午前11時12分 Editing 10 Set Genre ENTER HDD Use this command to assign a genre to a title. 1 Highlight the title you want to assign a genre to. ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Set Genre’ from the command menu panel. 3 ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Lock’ from the command menu panel. An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator with a padlock icon. Move DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play List titles. Select a genre for the title. Disc Navigator (HDD) 101 10Titles Highlight the title you want to 23:00 FRI Pr 4 SP 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM Play 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon 7:00PM Title SP name No Category Erase 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) Set Thumbnail Movie Erase Edit Section 4 Titles 9 20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPDrama Edit Chapter 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SPEntertainmt. 8 22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Lock SPGenre Name Comedy 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 7 19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Divide News 2h00m(1.0G) SetMulti-Mode Genre Sports Recent first All Genres Cancel Cancel 1h00m(1.0G) HDD SP Remain 30h30m 1 move. 1h00m(1.0G) ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Move’ from the command menu panel. 3 title. ENTER Select a new position for the Title to move Lock Disc Navigator (DVD) 11 HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM Original only You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock it later. 1 Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock). SP 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles 2 20:00 FRI 3/12 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 3 22:00 THU 2/12 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 4 19:00 MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Play List 2h00m(1.0G) MENU 1h00m(1.0G) DVD VR Mode Remain 0h30m Important • You can’t undo any edits made before changing the lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock command using the Undo option from the Disc Navigator menu. 10Titles 23:00 FRI 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM 23:00 Fri 7:00PM 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon 1h00m(1.0G) Insert position After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is displayed. Combine DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one. 97 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Editing 1 Highlight the title you want to combine. This title will remain in the same place after combining with another title. ENTER 2 Select one of the userdefinable genre names. Disc Navigator (HDD) 10Titles 101 23:00 FRI Pr 4 SP 11/29 MON3/12 7:00PM Play 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP Free1 11/29Mon 7:00PM SP 9 20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SP Free4 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 8 22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 Cancel SPGenre Name 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 7 19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Erase Free2 2h00m(1.0G) 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Combine’ from the command menu panel. Free3 Edit Free5 Recent first 2h00m(1.0G) Multi-Mode All Genres ENTER 3 Select another title to combine with the first. This title will be appended to the first title selected. The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended to title 1. Disc Navigator (DVD) 10Titles 11 23:00 FRI 3/12 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 2ch SP 11/29Mon 7:00PM 2 20:00 FRI 3/12 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 3 22:00 THU 2/12 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP SP 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles Play List 2h00m(1.0G) 3 MENU ENTER Input Genre Name Free 1 CAPS small 19:00 MON 29/11 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP OK ENTER 4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. OK to combine titles 1 and 3 ? Yes ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? ! N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ; AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I # DN O OOO 0 1 2 3 4 5 + – /@ [ c £ \ § 2 3 ´ µ¶ · 1h00m(1.0G) ! 1h00m(1.0G) Input a name for the genre. • The name can be up to 12 characters long. • For information on remote control key short cuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 93. 1h00m(1.0G) 4 DVD VR Mode Remain 0h30m Cancel 1h00m(1.0G) HDD SP Remain 30h30m Clear O ø ß$% = > _ & ± { _| } ~ ¡ – ® ˚ 1 3 /2 /4 ¿ ` UUUUY 6 7 8 9 < ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ¨ © a– << ¬ ¸ 1 –o 1/4 << 10 98 ページ Space ENTER No Genre Name 4 Select ‘OK’ to enter the name and exit. Multi-Mode HDD HDD Use this command to rename one of the five user-definable genres (Free 1 to Free 5). ENTER 1 Select ‘Genre Name’ from the command menu panel. Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at once, for example. ENTER 1 Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the command menu panel. ENTER 98 En 2 Select titles from the title list. Selected titles are marked with a . DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 99 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Editing 10 ENTER 3 Select the command that you want applied to all the marked titles. For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles. Disc Navigator (HDD) 101 Multi-Mode about your edits requires a certain amount of disc space. As you edit, this information builds up, eventually preventing you from editing further. 10Titles 23:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 4 SP Erase 23:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 4 SP Lock 2h00m(1.0G) 4 Titles Unlock 9 20:00 FRI 3/12 Pr 9 SPChange Genre 20:00 Fri 3/12 Pr 9 SP 8 22:00 THU 2/12 Pr 7 SPSingle Mode 22:00 Thu 2/12 Pr 7 SP 7 19:00 MON 29/11 Pr 2 SP 19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP Recent first 2h00m(1.0G) All Genres HDD SP Remain 30h30m 1h00m(1.0G) 1h00m(1.0G) Once the command is completed, Multi-Mode is automatically exited. Undo DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There is one level of undo (in other words, you can only undo the last edit you made). ENTER • Select ‘Undo’ from the command menu panel. • You can’t undo anything after exiting the Disc Navigator screen. Frequently asked questions • Why doesn’t the available recording time increase when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R? When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or DVD+R), the titles are no longer displayed, but the content remains on the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once media; they can’t be erased or rewritten. • I can’t edit my disc! You may find that as the available recording time is reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no longer possible. This is because information 99 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 11 100 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Copying and backup Chapter 11 Copying and backup Introduction Restrictions on copying Use the copying features of this recorder to: Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected using Copy Guard. These discs cannot be copied to the HDD. • Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to a DVD. • Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play in another player. • Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing. • Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD. The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy below for detailed instructions. For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 102 for detailed instructions. Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Minimum copying times on page 151 for more on copying times. If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is always done in real-time. When real-time copying from the HDD to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the original material are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 142). 100 En Some video material is copy-once protected. This means that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to a CPRM ver. 1.1 or higher VR mode DVD-RW, ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode DVD-R, or CPRMcompatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM on page 62 for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-once protected title can be added to the Copy List, and after it’s been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-once protected). You can identify copy-once protected material during playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark ( ! ) is shown. Copyright Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners. One Touch Copy * See also Copyright above. The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of where in the title you start the copy. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 101 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Copying and backup HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in whatever recording mode is currently set. Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is loaded when trying to copy from the HDD. REC MODE 1 If you’re copying from DVD to the HDD, select a recording mode. Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title playing will not result in a better quality recording. ONE TOUCH COPY 2 Press during playback to copy the current title. The front panel display indicates that the title is being copied. • High-speed copying is used when copying from the HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying. • Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the title. Cancelling One Touch Copy You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started. ONE TOUCH COPY • Press and hold for more than a second. Copying is cancelled and the video already copied is erased. • If you cancel an HDD to DVD-R/+R copy, the space available for recording does not return to the pre-copy figure. Notes on copying using One Touch Copy Copying to DVD • Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also copied. However, if you copy to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, only the first 11 40 characters of a name are copied. • The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same positions as the original when recording on to a DVD-R/ -RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW. • You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a title if any part of the title is copy-once protected. • A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Use a DVD-R/ -RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material. • Low resolution (SEP through LP modes1) widescreen material can’t be copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/ +RW. Use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material. • When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off, titles recorded in LP/ MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be highspeed copied to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM. • Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be high-speed copied to a DVD -R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Please use a DVD-R/-RW (VR mode) or DVD-RAM. • XP+ titles cannot be copied to DVD via One Touch Copy. • Titles over eight hours cannot be copied to single-layer DVD+R/+RW discs using One Touch Copy. Use DVD+R DL discs for titles over eight hours. • Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/ +RW using One Touch Copy. Copying to the HDD • The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours. • Title name and chapter markers are also copied, except when copying from a finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW. Note 1 In manual recording mode these equate to MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On). 101 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 102 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Copying and backup 11 • Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in the copy may be slightly changed from the original. • If some part of the title being copied is copy-protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will not be copied. Using Copy Lists * See also Copyright on page 100. At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list, erasing chapters you don’t need, or renaming titles, for example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not affect the actual video content; only the ‘virtual’ content of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the actual content is not being altered. Copying from HDD to DVD Important • The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. • The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System setting is changed (see Additional information about the TV system settings on page 148). • Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 167) will erase the Copy List. 1 102 En Load a recordable DVD. • It is possible to complete the following steps without having a recordable DVD loaded (or having an uninitialized DVD loaded); however, the steps are slightly different. • If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc for the copy, make sure it is initialized before you start. HOME MENU 2 Display the Home Menu. Select ‘Copy’ > ‘HDD DVD’. • If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to step 5 below. 4 If there is already a Copy List stored in the recorder, choose whether to ‘Create New Copy List’ or ‘Continue Using Previous Copy List’. • If you select Continue Using Previous Copy List, skip to step 10 below. • Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder. 3 ENTER ENTER 5 Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a title and press ENTER to add). Copy Recent first All Genres 8 Title HDD DVD (Video mode) 1>2>3 Select Title 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 WED MON S AT THU WED MON FRI WED 29/03 27/03 25/03 23/03 22/03 20/03 17/03 15/03 20:00 21:00 23:00 22:00 20:00 13:00 21:00 20:00 SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP Pr 2 Pr 4 Pr 9 Pr 6 Pr 2 Pr 9 Pr 4 Pr 2 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 20:00 1h00m(2.0G) Sports SP Pr 2 Copy List Total Current DVD Remain Wed29/03 Mon 27/03 S a t 25/03 T h u 23/03 Wed 22/03 Mon 20/03 F r i 17/03 Wed 15/03 Pr 2 Pr 4 Pr 9 Pr 6 Pr 2 Pr 9 Pr 4 Pr 2 Back Next 0.0G 4.3G Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink. There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to the Copy List if you are copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/ +RW: • When adding titles that contain copy-once protected material, the copy-once parts will not be added. • When adding titles that contain material of more than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title if high-speed copying is possible. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 103 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Copying and backup 11 Depending on the title1, high-speed copying may not be possible to DVDs. 6 panel. Display the command menu The command menu panel Copy Recent first All Genres 8 Title HDD DVD (Video mode) 1>2>3 Select Title 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 WED MON S AT THU WED MON FRI WED 29/03 27/03 25/03 23/03 22/03 20/03 17/03 15/03 20:00 21:00 23:00 22:00 20:00 13:00 21:00 20:00 SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP Pr 2 Pr 4 Pr 9 Pr 6 Pr 2 Pr 9 Pr 4 Pr 2 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 20:00 1h00m(2.0G) Sports SP Pr 2 Copy List Total Current DVD Remain Wed29/03 Mon 27/03 S a t 25/03 Thu 23/03 Wed 22/03 Mon 20/03 F r i 17/03 Wed 15/03 Pr 2 Pr 4 Pr 9 Pr 6 Pr 2 Pr 9 Pr 4 Pr 2 Back Next 4.3G 4.3G ENTER 7 Select ‘Next’ to move on to the Title Edit screen. 8 ENTER Select a title to edit. Copy 2 Title HDD DVD (Video mode) 1>2>3 Title Edit 1 2 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP Erase 20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP Title Name Erase Section Move Preview Back Next Cancel 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 1h00m(2.0G) Copy List Total Current DVD Remain 4.3G 4.3G A menu of editing commands appears: • Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see Erase on page 92). • Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List (see Title Name on page 93). • Erase Section – Erase part of a title (see Erase Section on page 94). • Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see Move on page 97). • Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List. • Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see Divide on page 95). • Combine – Combine two titles in the Copy List into one (see Combine on page 97). • Chapter Edit – Edit chapters within a Copy List title (see Chapter Edit on page 96): • Divide – Divide a chapter into two. • Erase/Move – Erase a chapter/ Change the chapter order. • Combine – Combine two chapters into one. • Set Thumbnail – Set the thumbnail frame for a title (see Set Thumbnail on page 94). • Recording Mode – Set the picture quality of the copy (see Recording Mode on page 105). • Bilingual – Set how bilingual audio should be copied when copying from HDD to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) and DVD+R/+RW (see Bilingual on page 105). • Cancel – Exit the menu. Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing. 9 panel. Display the command menu Note 1 The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD+R/+RW: • Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode. The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for DVD-R/-RW (Video Mode) and DVD+R/+RW: • Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On)). • LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off. • Bilingual recordings. • Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes. The following titles cannot be copied at high-speed for any types of DVD: • XP+ titles. 103 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 11 104 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Copying and backup Copying from DVD to HDD 10 ENTER Select ‘Next’ to proceed. Important Copy 2 Title HDD DVD (Video mode) • The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn’t accessible when a finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW or a DVD-Video is loaded. As long as the disc is not Copy Guard protected, you can still use the One Touch Copy function, however (see One Touch Copy on page 100). • The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time. • The Copy List will be erased if: – any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or edited. – the disc tray is opened. – playback is switched between Play List and Original. – the DVD disc is re-initialized. – Video mode disc is finalized. – the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 167). • It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC. 1>2>3 Title Edit 1 2 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 20:00 Wed22/03 Pr 2 SP Back Next 20:00 Wed29/03 Pr 2 SP 1h00m(2.0G) Copy List Total Current DVD Remain 4.3G 4.3G There are several options available from the next screen: • Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 105). • Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc or DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is similar to that of naming titles; see Title Name on page 93.) • Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R after copying.1 Select a title menu style from the following screen. HOME MENU 1 ENTER 11 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying. Copy 1>2>3 HDD DVD-RW Video Mode 3 Back Recording Mode 0h 16m Input Disc Name Recording Mode Disc Name High-Speed Finalize Off Copy List Total Current DVD Remain Finalize En Select ‘Copy’ > ‘DVD/CD ENTER Select a Copy List type. • Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder. Start Copy 4.3G 4.3G • If you’re using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc and the copy will span both layers, the Copy List Total bar will be purple. • The Current DVD Remain bar will be half-length if the first layer of a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc is already full. 104 ENTER 2 HDD’. HDD DVD (Video Mode) Start Copy Copy Time Display the Home Menu. ENTER 4 Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a title and press ENTER to add). Titles you’ve added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink. Note 1 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 105 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Copying and backup ENTER 5 Select ‘Next’ from the command menu panel to proceed to the title edit screen. ENTER 6 Select a title to edit. A menu appears of Copy List editing commands: • Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see Erase on page 92). • Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see Move on page 97). • Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List. • Cancel – Exit the menu. Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing. ENTER 7 Select ‘Next’ from the command menu panel to proceed to the copy options screen. • Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality (see Recording Mode below). ENTER 8 Select ‘Start Copy’ to start copying. 11 ENTER 2 Select a recording mode for the copy. • High-Speed Copy1 – The Copy List is copied at the same recording quality as the original. • XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN2 – The Copy List is copied at the specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than the original, the copy will not be better quality than the original.) If you select MN above, you can also change the level setting (MN1 to MN323, LPCM or XP+4) from the Recording Quality box that appears. • Optimized2,5 – The recording quality is automatically adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-time. When you change the recording mode setting, you can see how much disc space it will require. If this is more than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able to start copying. In this case, either change the recording quality, or press RETURN/EXIT to go back to the Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List. Bilingual Recording Mode ENTER 1 Select ‘Recording Mode’ from the command menu panel. 1 Select the title containing the audio you want to change. ENTER 2 Select ‘Bilingual’ from the command menu panel. Note 1 When copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original. 2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 142). 3 When copying to a DVD+R/+RW, MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available. 4 XP+ mode available only when copying to HDD. 5 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD. Due to remaining space on the disc or the title that you copy, this mode does not always exactly fill a disc. 105 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 106 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Copying and backup 11 3 ENTER Select a bilingual audio option. ENTER 5 Select ‘Start’. Disc Back-up Using disc backup Read from disc and save to HDD. Start reading? * See also Copyright on page 100. This feature offers a simple way to make a backup copy of finalized DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) discs or DVD+R/+RW discs. The data is copied first to the hard disk drive1, then on to another recordable DVD disc. HOME MENU 1 2 Display the Home Menu. ENTER Select ‘Copy’ > ‘Disc backup’. ENTER 3 Select a backup option. There are three backup options: • Start new disc back-up – Start making a backup of a disc. • Resume writing data – Record the backup data already on the HDD to a recordable DVD. • Erase back-up data – Erase the backup data on the HDD. 4 Load the disc you want to make a backup of. You can only make backup copies of finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs, finalized DVD+R or DVD+RW discs (excluding DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs). Disc Back-up No disc. Please load a disc to be backed-up. Start 106 En Cancel Start Cancel • To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY. • You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. 6 When the data has been copied, take out the disc and load a blank* recordable DVD. * If you’re using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the disc doesn’t have to be blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be erased in the backup process. Disc Back-up Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive. Please eject the disc and load a recordable disc Start Cancel You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0, 2.1 or 2.2 disc, or DVD-RW ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the backup. • If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot undo the finalization later. • Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may be cases where the contents of the disc you’re backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If this happens, please try another brand of disc. • DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up to DVD-R/-RW discs; DVD+R/+RW discs can only be backed up to DVD+R/ +RW discs. Note 1 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 107 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Copying and backup 11 7 Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data to the blank disc. Disc Back-up Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive. The disc contents will be overwritten. OK to start? Start Cancel • To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY. • You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However, this will make the disc unusable (although if you are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc you can re-initialize it in order to make it usable again — see Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 73.) 8 After the recorder has finished recording the backup disc, you can select whether to make another backup of the same data or exit. Disc Back-up Disc back-up finished. To make another back-up copy, please load a recordable disc. Start Cancel • Select Start to make another backup copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to make another backup copy, return to step 7 above. 9 If you don’t need to keep the backup data on the HDD, you can delete it now. Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to keep it (you can delete it later if you want to). Disc Back-up The backed-up data is still on the HDD. Erasing it will increase the free space available. OK to Erase? Yes No • If you decide to leave the backup data on the HDD, you can make backup copies to recordable DVD discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu. 107 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 108 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying DivX files (PC VIDEO) 12 Chapter 12 Playing and copying DivX files (PC VIDEO) • Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change the page. The PC VIDEO function is used to play DivX files recorded on the HDD, DVD, or CD-R/ -RW/-ROM disc. DivX files stored on a DVD or CD-R/-RW/-ROM disc or USB device can be copied to the HDD. PC VIDEO (HDD) 10 Folders Folder List Folder Important • A demo file is recorded on the HDD upon purchase. For more information about the demo file, see Demo Mode on page 146. HDD 001 Movie1 002 Movie2 003 Movie3 004 Movie4 005 Movie5 006 Movie6 007 Movie7 008 Movie8 MENU Movie5 Total 999 999MB Remain 100.0 G Currently selected folder in folder list Playing DivX files Folder information ENTER HOME MENU 1 2 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 5 Select what you want to play. Playback starts after you press ENTER. • Press , then You can also select Play from the command menu panel. • For a description of operations during playback, see Playing DivX video files on page 78. Select ‘PC VIDEO’. ENTER 3 Select the location of the files you want to play back. • View/Edit VIDEO FILE on the HDD – Plays DivX files recorded on the HDD. • View VIDEO FILE on a DVD/CD – Plays DivX files recorded on a DVD or CD-R/ -RW/-ROM disc. Playing DivX files on the HDD that have not yet been viewed The files can be played easily, simply by pressing the PC VIDEO button.1 • ENTER 4 Select the folder containing the title you want to play back. 108 En PC VIDEO Playing DivX files. • If there are multiple DivX files that have not yet been viewed, the file recorded on the HDD at the most recent date is played.2 • If there are no DivX files that have not yet been viewed, the file recorded on the HDD at the most recent date is played.2 Note 1 This operation cannot be performed while the recorder’s GUI is displayed. 2 Files recorded with the Connect PC function are not included. However, if the only unviewed file is one recorded with the Connect PC function, that file is played. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 109 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying DivX files (PC VIDEO) • Copy VIDEO FILE from a USB Device – Copies DivX files from a USB device onto the HDD. • For a description of operations during playback, see Playing DivX video files on page 78. Changing the display style of the PC VIDEO 1 Display the view options panel. 12 4 Display the command menu panel. • To copy from a USB device, proceed to step 6. The command menu panel The view options panel PC VIDEO (DVD/CD) 10 Folders Folder List Display Mode Folder Folder 001 Movie1 002 Movie2 003 Movie3 004 Movie4 005 Movie5 006 Movie6 007 Movie7 008 Movie8 10 Folders Folder List PC VIDEO (HDD) Folder MENU HDD 001 Movie1 002 Movie2 003 Movie3 004 Movie4 005 Movie5 006 Movie6 007 Movie7 008 Movie8 Play Edit FOLDER MENU Movie5 Total HDD Total 999 5 100MB Remain 100.0 G Movie5 999MB Remain 100.0 G 5 ENTER Select ‘Edit’. ENTER 2 Choose ‘Display Mode’ then press ENTER to see the available view options. Choose between folder and title display modes. ENTER 3 Choose a view option, then press ENTER. The display mode will change to that which you have chosen. Copying DivX files to the HDD HOME MENU 1 2 Display the Home Menu. ENTER ENTER Select ‘PC VIDEO’. 3 Select the location of the files you want to copy. • View VIDEO FILE on a DVD/CD – Copies DivX files from a DVD or CD-R/ -RW/-ROM disc onto the HDD. ENTER 6 Select ‘Copy all to HDD’ from the menu. On pressing ENTER all titles or folders on the DVD/CD or the USB device are copied to the HDD. • When a folder is selected, you can copy only the titles contained in the folder by using ’Copy to HDD’. • You can also copy titles by selecting ’Copy’ > ‘DVD/CD HDD’ > ‘VIDEO FILE’ from the Home Menu. • To cancel copying press ENTER. • Up to 50 000 files or 999 folders can be recorded on the HDD. Up to 999 files can be stored in one folder. • Up to 99 folders/999 titles on the DVD/ CD or the USB device can be copied/ displayed. • No other recorder operation is possible while DivX files are being copied. • The timer recording operation does not function while DivX files are being copied. 109 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 12 110 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying DivX files (PC VIDEO) Editing files on the HDD Erasing a title or folder 1 Select the title or folder you want to erase. • Erasing a folder will erase all the titles contained in it.1 Please be careful! ENTER 2 Select ‘Erase’ from the command menu panel. ENTER 3 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. • You can also erase a title or folder by pressing CLEAR when the title or folder is highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm. Naming titles and folders 1 Select the title or folder you want to rename. ENTER 2 Select ‘Edit’ from the command menu panel. ENTER 3 Select ‘Title Name’ or ‘Folder Name’. 4 Enter a new name for the title/folder. Title names or Folder names can be up to 64 characters long. See Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 93 and Using a USB keyboard to enter a name on page 94 for how to enter a name. 110 En Note 1 Some time may be required to erase a folder if it includes many titles. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 111 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying music (Jukebox) 13 Chapter 13 Playing and copying music (Jukebox) The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder’s HDD to store and playback music from your CDs. WMA/MP3 files recorded on CD-R/-RW/-ROM discs, DVDs or USB devices can also be copied to the HDD. Copying music to the HDD The first step is to copy some music to the HDD. CD audio, WMA and MP3 files are copied at high speed. Usually, each track on a CD or DVD is categorized and copied onto the HDD on the basis of information on artists and albums.1 Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot be copied to a recordable DVD disc. ENTER 4 Select the location of the files you want to copy. • Play Music on a DVD/CD – Copies files from a CD or DVD onto the HDD. When an Audio CD never before played on the recorder is loaded, the recorder automatically searches for the titles on that Audio CD (see About the automatic display of titles on page 112). • Play Music on a USB Device – Copies files from a USB device onto the HDD. 5 panel. Display the command menu The command menu panel Important • While copying, no other recorder operation is possible. • When copying, scheduled timer recordings will not start until copying is complete. • Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully. 1 Load the CD/DVD you want to copy to the HDD or connect the USB device. HOME MENU 2 3 Display the Home Menu. ENTER Jukebox (DVD/CD) Track List 1 TRACK1 CD 10 Tracks Play 2 TRACK2 Acquire Track Name 3 TRACK3 Edit 4 TRACK4 Play Mode MENU 5 TRACK5 6 TRACK6 7 TRACK7 8 TRACK8 HDD TRACK1 0.04.30 / 1.14.00 650MB classical Remain 100.0 G ENTER 6 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Copy all to HDD’. On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the DVD/CD or the USB device are copied to the HDD. Select ‘Jukebox’. Note 1 • Up to 50 000 tracks can be created in the Jukebox. (You can create up to 50 000 artists/albums in total.) • Sound quality is not worsened when you copy data from another source. • When playing back an album copied from a source whose original audio track plays continuously (such as a live recording), there will be a brief pause in sound between tracks. • Audio CDs are classified according to the information in the Gracenote database. • WMA/MP3 files are classified according to the information included in the files. Track names may differ from the names of the original files. • Depending on the name of the original folder and track, the artist and album under which the folder or track is classified may differ. 111 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 13 112 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying music (Jukebox) • When a folder of WMA/MP3 files is selected, you can copy only the files contained in the folder by using ’Copy to HDD’. • You can also copy tracks (or files) by selecting ’Copy’ > ‘DVD/CD HDD’ > ‘CD’ or ‘MUSIC FILE’ from the Home Menu. (For an Audio CD, a track check screen is displayed.) • To cancel copying press ENTER. • If the CD loaded contains both CD audio tracks and WMA/MP3 files, the part currently selected will copy. • Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB device can be copied/displayed. • Only the files that have been read can be copied. To copy the files that have not been read, reload the files (see below). • Press ENTER to cancel searching. HDD/DVD RECORDER Accessing to Gracenote Database... Cancel Upon completion of search, album name, artist name, track name, and genre are automatically displayed.2 • When multiple titles have been found, use / to select a title and press ENTER. If you select ‘No Information’ and press ENTER, ‘Unknown’ is displayed. • ‘Unknown’ is displayed when there are no titles found. • Depending on the title, a different title name may be displayed. • Information on new CDs on sale may not be registered in the Gracenote database installed in this unit. Use the Update Disc with the latest data downloaded from the Pioneer website to update the built-in Gracenote database (see Gracenote Database on page 146). • GUI displays may show the Gracenote database as ‘Database’. Reloading files from a WMA/MP3 disc or a USB device If you have a WMA/MP3 disc or a USB device with more than 1000 files and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the tracks using the reload function. 1 Navigate to the last entry in the folder list (‘Read next: ...’). ENTER 2 Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the disc or the connected USB device. It takes several minutes to reload files.1 About the automatic display of titles This unit has built-in information on titles extracted from the Gracenote® database. When an Audio CD that has never been played on the recorder is loaded and the track list screen is opened from the Jukebox, the recorder automatically searches for titles. The screen shown below is displayed. 112 En Searching titles again If the titles are not properly displayed, use the following procedure to search for titles again from the Gracenote database on the recorder. 1 Load the CD. HOME MENU 2 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 3 Select ‘Jukebox’ > ‘Play Music on a DVD/CD’. Note 1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the Jukebox screen while the recorder is reloading files. 2 The album name, artist name, track name and genre name may not be displayed properly. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 113 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying music (Jukebox) ENTER 4 Select ‘Acquire Track Name’ from the command menu panel. 13 ENTER 4 Select the artist you want to play back. The screen below shows artists stored on the HDD: Playing music from the Jukebox Jukebox (HDD) Artist List 10 Artists ALL You can select artists, albums or individual tracks from the Jukebox to play. Artist Original HOME MENU 1 Display the Home Menu. HDD 1 Artist1 2 Artist2 3 Artist3 4 Artist4 5 Artist5 6 Artist6 7 Artist7 Artist1 MENU Total 10 Remain 100.0 G 2 ENTER 3 ENTER Select ‘Jukebox’. Select a Jukebox option. • Play/Edit Music on the HDD – Listen to CDs or WMA/MP3 files that have been copied to the HDD. • Play Music on a DVD/CD – Listen to music on a DVD or CD. Proceed to step 6 for audio CDs, step 5 for WMA/MP3 files. When an Audio CD that has never been played on the recorder is loaded, the recorder automatically searches for the titles on that Audio CD (see About the automatic display of titles on page 112). • Play Music on a USB Device – Listen to music from an external USB device. Proceed to step 5. To play back all of the tracks of the selected artist, proceed to step 7. Press ENTER to switch to the album display of the selected artist. • This step is for the display mode set to Artist. The operation varies when the display mode is set to other settings. • To play back all artists, select All and proceed to step 7. • Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change the page. ENTER 5 Select the album you want to play back. To play back all of the tracks of the selected album, proceed to step 7. Press ENTER to switch to the track display of the selected album. • To play back all albums, select All and proceed to step 7.1 6 Select the track you want to play back. • To play back all tracks, select All.1 7 8 Note 1 ALL cannot be selected for DVDs or CDs. Display the command menu. ENTER Select ‘Play’ from the menu. 113 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 114 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying music (Jukebox) 13 • For a description of operations during playback, see Playing Audio CDs and WMA/MP3 discs on page 77. Playing music files on the HDD in random order The files can easily be played in random order simply by pressing the MUSIC button.1 MUSIC • Start playback. Audio slideshows combining the photos and music recorded on the HDD are played. For details, see Playing a slideshow on page 118. • The play list switches each time the MUSIC button is pressed. For details on play lists, see Playing your favourite music (Play List) below. • For a description of operations during playback other than that of the MUSIC button, see Playing Audio CDs and WMA/ MP3 discs on page 77. Playing your favourite music (Play List) You can collect and play back only your favourite songs stored on the HDD. Creating a play list ENTER 1 Select a track you want to add to a play list. ENTER 2 Select ‘Add to Play List’ from the command menu panel. ENTER 3 Select a play list (‘Play List 1’ to ‘Play List 4’) where you want to add the selected track. • You can add up to 25 songs to a play list. • You can rename a play list (see Editing the HDD Jukebox on page 116). Playing a play list Repeat play 1 1 Display the command menu panel during playback. Display the view options panel. The view options panel Jukebox (HDD) Artist List 2 ENTER Select ‘Repeat’. • Select Play Mode when audio files stored on a DVD/CD or a USB device are being played back (see The Play Mode menu on page 81). Display Mode Artist Artist Play List Original Original HDD 114 En 001 Artist1 002 Artist2 003 Artist3 004 Artist4 005 Artist5 006 Artist6 007 Artist7 Artist1 MENU Total 10 Remain 100.0 G ENTER 3 Select a repeat function from the command menu panel. • Repeat Artist – Repeats all tracks of an artist being played back. • Repeat Album – Repeats all tracks of an album being played back. • Repeat Track – Repeats the track being played back. • Repeat Off – Cancels repeat playback. 10 Artists ALL 2 ENTER Select ‘Play List’. ENTER 3 Select a play list (‘Play List 1’ to ‘Play List 4’) you want to play back. ENTER 4 Select ‘Play’ from the command menu panel. Note 1 This operation cannot be performed while the recorder’s GUI is displayed. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 115 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying music (Jukebox) Cancel – Cancels the switching of the display. Changing the display style of the Jukebox • Display Mode HDD Album – Displays the folders of the WMA/MP3 files. Track – Displays the tracks of the WMA/ MP3 files. ENTER 1 Select an artist/album you want to change the display for. 2 Cancel – Cancels the switching of the display. Display the view options panel. ENTER 3 Select a view option. • Display Mode Artist – Displays the artists copied onto this unit from the earliest date. Album – Displays the albums of the selected artist. When you select All, albums of all artists are displayed. Track – Displays the tracks of the selected artist/album. When you select All, tracks of all artists/albums are displayed. Cancel – Cancels the switching of the display. • Play List Original – Displays the settings of Display Mode (Artist). Play List 1 to Play List 4 – Displays the tracks added to each play list. Favourites – Displays up to 25 tracks you listen to most frequently. Cancel – Cancels the switching of the display. CD 13 WMA/MP3 1 Display the view options panel. Copying albums/tracks You can copy the albums stored on the HDD to other folders of a different artist on the HDD. Also, you can copy the tracks stored on the HDD to other albums on the HDD. • You cannot copy the albums/tracks stored on the HDD to a DVD or a USB device. HOME MENU 1 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 2 Select ‘Jukebox’ > ‘Play/Edit Music on the HDD’. ENTER 3 Select an album/track you want to copy. ENTER 4 Select ‘Edit’ > ‘Copy Album’ or ‘Copy Track’ from the command menu panel. ENTER 5 Select an artist/album you want to copy the selected album/track to. Select New Artist or New Album if you want to create a new artist/album. The name of an artist/album becomes A_number/ A_number_F_number. ENTER 2 Select a view option. • Data Format CD – Displays the Audio CD’s tracks. MUSIC FILE – Displays the folders/tracks of the WMA/MP3 files. ENTER 6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. 115 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 116 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying music (Jukebox) 13 Editing the HDD Jukebox A number of commands are available for editing and changing the playback behavior of albums. HOME MENU 1 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 2 Select ‘Jukebox’ > ‘Play/Edit Music on the HDD’. 3 ENTER Select what you want to edit. ENTER 4 Select an edit function from the command menu panel. • Erase – Deletes the selected artist/ album/track.1 • Edit > Artist name – Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the artist. See Title Name on page 93 for how to enter names. • Edit > Album name – Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the album. See Title Name on page 93 for how to enter names. • Edit > Track name – Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the track. See Title Name on page 93 for how to enter names. • Play List name – Enter a name of up to 12 characters for the Play List. See Title Name on page 93 for how to enter names. 116 En Note 1 Some time may be required to erase an artist or album if it includes many tracks. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 117 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer) 14 Chapter 14 Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer) From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on the HDD, DVD or CD-R/-RW/-ROM, or on a USBequipped digital camera.1 You can also import files and save them to the recorder’s HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc. • From the Folder Information column, you can change thumbnails via the / buttons. • Press PREV or NEXT to change the page. Currently selected folder in folder list Locating JPEG picture files PhotoViewer (HDD) Select Folder HOME MENU 1 2 Display the Home Menu. ENTER Folder Select ‘PhotoViewer’. 001 Folder1 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 HDD ENTER 3 Select the location of the files you want to view or edit. • View/Edit Photos on the HDD – View or edit photos already stored on the recorder’s HDD. • View Photos on a DVD/CD – View photos on a DVD, Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM or CD-R/-RW. • View Photos on a USB Device – View photos on a digital camera (or other USB device) connected to the USB port. • Copy Files from a Digital Camera – Copy all DCF files directly from a connected digital camera to a recordable DVD-R/-RW. 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB Remain 100.0 G Folder information 1/3 Pages in folder list 5 Select the file you want to view, copy or edit. Currently selected thumbnail PhotoViewer (HDD) Folder2 File 12 Files HDD ENTER 4 Select the folder containing the files you want to view, copy or edit. The first image from the selected folder is displayed as thumbnail at the bottom of the screen. FOLDER MENU Remain 100.0 G 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 PIOR0000 PIOR0001 PIOR0002 PIOR0003 PIOR0004 PIOR0005 PIOR0006 PIOR0007 PIOR0008 PIOR0009 PIOR0010 PIOR0011 Folder Size 999 MB FILE MENU 1/84 Pages in file list • The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder to load the file. Note 1 Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB device on page 118). 117 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 14 118 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer) • Press PREV or NEXT to change the page. • You can change folders via the / buttons. 1 Display the view options panel. The view options panel • If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that the disc and file formats are compatible with this recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created disc compatibility on page 11). • The thumbnails of files that cannot be played are displayed as the logo. PhotoViewer (HDD) Folder2 Display Mode File File Style 12 Files 12 Files HDD Reloading files from a disc or USB device If you have a disc with more than 1000 files and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the images using the reload function. 1 Navigate to the last entry in the folder list (‘Read next: ...’). ENTER 2 Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the disc or connected USB device. It will take a moment (at most a few minutes) to load in the images.1 Changing the display style of the PhotoViewer You can choose to display photos by grouping them by folder, file, or number of thumbnails. Remain 100.0 G En Folder Size 999 MB PIOR0000 PIOR0001 PIOR0002 PIOR0003 PIOR0004 PIOR0005 PIOR0006 PIOR0007 PIOR0008 PIOR0009 PIOR0010 PIOR0011 FILE MENU 1/84 ENTER 2 Choose ‘Display Mode’ or ‘Style’ then press ENTER to see the available view options. • Display Mode – Choose between folder and file display modes. • Style – Choose between displays of 1, 4 and 12 thumbnails. ENTER 3 Choose a view option, then press ENTER. The display mode will change to that which you have chosen. Playing a slideshow ENTER 1 Select a folder from the folder list. To start the slideshow from the first file in the folder, skip to step 3 after choosing the desired folder and pressing . 2 118 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 Select a thumbnail. • Use PREV/ NEXT to display the previous/next page of thumbnails. Note 1 You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you enter the PhotoViewer again, it will resume reloading.) DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 119 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer) 14 Zooming an image 3 panel. Display the command menu The command menu panel PhotoViewer (HDD) Folder2 File 12 Files HDD Remain 100.0 G 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 PIOR0000 PIOR0001 PIOR0002 PIOR0003 PIOR0004 PIOR0005 PIOR0006 PIOR0007 PIOR0008 PIOR0009 PIOR0010 PIOR0011 Folder Size 999 MB Start Slideshow Start Audio Slideshow File Options Print Copy to DVD FILE MENU Detailed Information Multi-Mode ENTER 1 Press during the slideshow to zoom the picture. Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen. 2 Use to move the zoomed area. 1/84 Rotating an image ENTER 4 Select ‘Start Slideshow’ or ‘Start Audio Slideshow’. When Start Audio Slideshow is selected, you can enjoy the slideshow while playing back music in Jukebox. Select the theme and play list, then press ENTER. For details, see Creating photo movies on page 120. For more information on adding music to the HDD, see Playing and copying music (Jukebox) on page 111. • You can also select a file or folder then press PLAY to start playing the slideshow. • Use PREV/ NEXT to display the previous/next picture, or PAUSE to pause the slideshow.1 • Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and right. • Large picture files may take a few seconds to display. This is normal. STOP 5 During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move the area of the picture displayed.1 Press to return to the thumbnail. • You can also use the RETURN/EXIT button. You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow so you can always view pictures the right way up, whichever way they were taken.1 ANGLE • Press during the slideshow to rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90º. Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in increments of 90º. Playing JPEG files on the HDD in random order The files can easily be played in random order, simply by pressing the PHOTO button.2 PHOTO • Playing audio slideshows. Use this procedure to play audio slideshows combining the photos and music recorded on the HDD. • The photos switch in units of folders each time the PHOTO button is pressed. • To stop playback, press STOP. HOME MENU 6 Press to exit the PhotoViewer. Note 1 This function does not work when Start Audio Slideshow is selected. 2 This operation cannot be performed while the recorder’s GUI is displayed. 119 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 14 120 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer) Creating photo movies Use this procedure to create photo movies combining the photos and music recorded on the HDD. Photo movies are stored on the HDD as video titles and can be copied to DVDs. Important • Created video titles should be used only personally, without distributing them to others. etc.). Normal (OFF) - Photos are displayed on the entire screen and switch. • Play List Select the music to be used for the photo movie. For details, see Playing your favourite music (Play List) on page 114. Play List 1 to Play List 4 – Select from the play lists stored in the Jukebox. Favourites – Use up to 25 of the tracks you listen to most often. ENTER 1 Select a folder from the folder list. A photo movie will be created using all of the photos in the folder. ENTER 2 Select ‘Create Photo Movie’ from the command menu panel. 3 Select a theme and a play list. Use the / buttons to move the cursor to Theme or Play List. Use the / buttons to select the item. • Theme Select the way in which the photos are displayed. Happy moments (1) - Photos are displayed on the entire screen and switch as they fade out and in between every photo. Happy moments (2) - Photos are displayed on parts of the screen (upper right, lower left, etc.) and switch. Nostalgic memories - Photos are displayed in black and white on parts of the screen (upper right, lower left, etc.) and switch. Sweetest recollections - Photos switch slowly with motion (enlargement, reduction, movement, etc.). Blissful life - Photos switch with motion (enlargement, reduction, movement, 120 En 4 Select ‘Next’. Cautions related to copyrights are displayed. ENTER 5 Select ‘Yes’. Photo movies are recorded on the HDD as they are played. • No other recorder operation is possible while photo movies are being recorded. • The timer recording operation does not function while photo movies are being recorded. • To stop recording, press F STOP REC for more than three seconds. Importing files to the HDD You can import files and save them to the HDD1 from a CD, DVD or a connected USB camera. Once on the HDD you can edit and organize your pictures and print them out if you’ve connected a PictBridge-compatible printer. ENTER 1 Select the location of folders/ files you want to import. To import a whole folder, select the desired folder, press , and skip to step 3 below. • To import multiple folders, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 121. Note 1 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/-RW. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 121 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer) 2 Select a file to import. • To import multiple files, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or folders below. 14 An orange check mark box () is shown by the item you selected. A blue check mark box () appears on the folder select screen when files from that folder are selected. Multi-Mode PhotoViewer (HDD) Select Folder ENTER 3 Select ‘Copy to HDD’ from the command menu panel. Folder ENTER 4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm and copy the folder(s)/file(s), or ‘No’ to cancel. • The files will be copied to the HDD with the same folder structure as the original. • Importing to the HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD, or if there are already the maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder, total 50 000 files). Selecting multiple files or folders The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple folders/files at once for importing or editing. ENTER 1 Select the folder containing the files you want to import. ENTER 2 Select ‘Multi-Mode’ from the command menu panel. 3 list. ENTER Select files/folders from the HDD Remain 100.0 G 4 panel. 001 Folder1 002 Folder2 003 Folder3 004 Folder4 005 Folder5 006 Folder6 007 Folder7 008 Folder8 FOLDER MENU 002 Folder2 Files 999 Folder 999 MB 1/3 Display the command menu ENTER 5 Select the command you want to apply to all the selected items. Copying files to a DVD-R/-RW Using this feature you can copy all the files1 (including audio and movie files) stored on a connected USB camera to a recordable DVD disc. A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible with JPEG file playback. Once the files have been copied, the disc is automatically finalized. Important • Use a blank DVD-R/-RW disc, or one that has already been initialized for Video mode recording but has nothing yet recorded on it. Discs that have already been recorded on (as well as CD-R/-RW discs) cannot be used. Note 1 • There is a limit to the number of files/amount of data that you can copy at one time. • Only DCF format files in DCIM folders can be copied to a recordable DVD-R/-RW. 121 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 122 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer) 14 • After backing up the pictures in your digital camera to DVD, we recommend verifying that they have been recorded properly before deleting anything from the camera. 1 Load a blank (or unrecorded Video mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. HOME MENU 2 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 3 Select ‘PhotoViewer’ > ‘Copy Files from a Digital Camera’. ENTER 4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. • Note that during copying, any timer programmes set to start will not begin, and no other operations are possible. Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW This feature allows you just to copy some of the files stored on HDD to a DVD. A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible with JPEG file playback. Note however that you may need to finalize the disc before it will play on another DVD player (copying selected files doesn’t automatically finalize the disc). Important • A maximum of 99 slideshow titles can be recorded. • One slideshow title can contain up to 99 files. If there are more files than this in the slideshow, multiple slideshows are created on the disc. • If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the slideshow will become unplayable but the free space will not increase. 122 En 1 Load a blank (or unfinalized Video mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. HOME MENU 2 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 3 Select ‘PhotoViewer’ > ‘View/ Edit Photos on the HDD’. ENTER 4 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to copy. • Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it. • To copy multiple folders, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 121. ENTER 5 Select ‘Copy to DVD’ from the command menu panel. ENTER 6 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. • Folder names on the disc will be number PIONR. File names will be PHOT number. • Note that during copying, any timer programmes set to start will not begin, and no other operation is possible. • While ‘Cancel’ is displayed, you can press ENTER to cancel. Editing files on the HDD There are a number of commands you can use to edit and organize your pictures stored on the HDD. Creating a new folder 1 From the folder list, display the command menu panel. ENTER 2 Select ‘New Folder’. The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the name F_number. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 123 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer) • There can be up to 999 folders on the HDD. Erasing a file or folder 14 • Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it. • To copy multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 121. ENTER 1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to erase. • To erase multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 121. • Erasing a folder will erase all the files contained in it.1 Please be careful! • You can’t erase files that have been locked. • Folders containing locked files can’t be erased. Unlocked files in the folder, however, will be erased. ENTER 2 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’ from the command menu panel. 3 ENTER Select ‘Erase’ or ‘Erase Folder’. ENTER 2 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’ from the command menu panel. ENTER 3 Select ‘Copy’ or ‘Copy Folder Contents’. PhotoViewer (HDD) Folder2 File 12 Files HDD Remain 100.0 G 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 PIOR0000 PIOR0001 PIOR0002 PIOR0003 PIOR0004 PIOR0005 PIOR0006 PIOR0007 PIOR0008 PIOR0009 PIOR0010 PIOR0011 Folder Size 999 MB Start Slideshow Erase Start Audio Slideshow Copy File Options Rename File Print Lock FILE Copy to DVD MENU Detailed Information Multi-Mode Cancel 1/84 ENTER 4 Select a folder to copy the folder(s)/file(s) to. PhotoViewer (HDD) Folder2 File 12 Files HDD Remain 100.0 G 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 PIOR0000 PIOR0001 PIOR0002 PIOR0003 PIOR0004 PIOR0005 PIOR0006 PIOR0007 PIOR0008 PIOR0009 PIOR0010 PIOR0011 Folder Size 999 MB ENTER Start Slideshow Erase Start Audio Slideshow Copy File Options Rename File Print Lock FILE Copy to DVD MENU Detailed Information Multi-Mode Cancel 5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. • Copying to the HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD; if there are already the maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD. 1/84 Naming files and folders ENTER 4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. • You can also erase a file or folder by pressing CLEAR when the file or folder is highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm. 1 Select the file or folder you want to rename. You can’t rename files that have been locked. Copying files 2 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’ from the command menu panel. ENTER ENTER ENTER 1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to copy. ENTER 3 Select ‘Rename File’ or ‘Rename Folder’. Note 1 Some time may be required to erase a folder if it includes many files. 123 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 14 124 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Playing and copying photos (PhotoViewer) PhotoViewer (HDD) Folder2 File 12 Files HDD Remain 100.0 G 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 PIOR0000 PIOR0001 PIOR0002 PIOR0003 PIOR0004 PIOR0005 PIOR0006 PIOR0007 PIOR0008 PIOR0009 PIOR0010 PIOR0011 Folder Size 999 MB Start Slideshow Erase Start Audio Slideshow Copy File Options Rename File Print Lock FILE Copy to DVD MENU Detailed Information Multi-Mode Cancel Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them. To remove all locks within a given folder, choose ‘Folder Option’ > ‘Unlock Folder Contents’. To view detailed information This feature allows you to check the settings of the camera from which you imported the photos. 1/84 ENTER 4 Enter a new name for the file/folder. File names or Folder names can be up to 64 characters long. 1 Select the file for which you would like to see detailed information. See Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name on page 93 and Using a USB keyboard to enter a name on page 94 for how to enter a name. 2 Select ‘Detailed Information’. When no detailed information is available, nothing is displayed. Locking/Unlocking files Printing files Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure and prevent them from being renamed. Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB port will enable you to print out picture files1 stored on the HDD, a CD/DVD or directly from a digital camera. Make sure that the printer (and your digital camera if you are using that as a source) is connected to the recorder before starting. Use the same process to both lock and unlock files. Locked files are displayed in the PhotoViewer with a padlock icon. ENTER ENTER 1 Select the file(s) you want to lock (or unlock). • To lock/unlock multiple files or folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 121. ENTER 2 Select ‘File Options’ or ‘Folder Options’ from the command menu panel. ENTER 3 Select ‘Lock’ or ‘Lock Folder Contents’. PhotoViewer (HDD) Folder2 File 12 Files HDD Remain 100.0 G 124 En 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 PIOR0000 PIOR0001 PIOR0002 PIOR0003 PIOR0004 PIOR0005 PIOR0006 PIOR0007 PIOR0008 PIOR0009 PIOR0010 PIOR0011 Folder Size 999 MB Start Slideshow Erase Start Audio Slideshow Copy File Options Rename File Print Lock FILE Copy to DVD MENU Detailed Information Multi-Mode Cancel 1/84 1 ENTER Select the file(s) you want to print. • To print multiple files, use the MultiMode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 121. ENTER 2 Select ‘Print’ from the command menu panel. ENTER 3 Select ‘Start’ to confirm or ‘Cancel’ to cancel. • Once printing has started, you can cancel by pressing ENTER. Tip • Paper size and layout can be set; the options available depend on your printer — check the printer manual for details. • This recorder may not work correctly with all printers. Note 1 Picture files should be standard DCF format. Non-standard files may not print properly. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 125 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Copying files from a PC (Connect PC) 15 Chapter 15 Copying files from a PC (Connect PC) When the recorder is connected to a PC using the USB port, WMA/MP3, JPEG and DivX files stored on the PC can be copied onto the recorder’s HDD. Use Windows Explorer or Windows Media Player 11, depending on the type of file copied. Important • Install Windows Media Player 11 on the PC before connected it to the recorder. • For more information on Connect PC, see Using a PC on page 25. 5 Verify that the import screen is displayed on the device. If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes, the import screen is automatically closed. To reopen it, you will have to repeat steps 2 through 4. • To copy WMA/MP3 files, see Copying WMA/MP3 files below. • To copy JPEG, DivX files, see Copying JPEG and DivX files on page 127. Copying WMA/MP3 files From the PC: Connecting the PC 1 Connect the PC via USB cable. The screen below is displayed. Press ‘’ to close the screen. *Depending on the Windows OS version and the Windows Media Player settings, the screen shown below may not be displayed. 1. Open Windows Media Player 11. The device settings screen appears. Click ‘Cancel’. *Depending on the settings for Windows Media Player 11, the screen shown below may not be displayed. HOME MENU 2 3 Display the Home Menu. ENTER ENTER Select ‘Connect PC’ > ‘USB’. 4 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. Operating the PC, click ‘’ on the window in step 1 to close it. ‘Cancel’ 2. Click ‘Sync’. 3. Choose the artist, album or song you would like to copy, and press the right mouse button. 4. Click ‘Add to Sync list’. 5. Click ‘Start Sync’. 125 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 15 126 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Copying files from a PC (Connect PC) This begins the synchronization process. When finished, the message ‘Synchronized to Device’ is displayed in Windows Media Player 11. •If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes after copying, the import screen on this device is automatically closed. Note • When using the sync function of Windows Media Player 11, music, artist and album folders are created as follows: Root Music Artist 1 Album 1 music1.mp3 music2.mp3 ‘Start Sync’ Album 2 music1.wma Album 1 music1.mp3 For more information refer to the Help menu of Windows Media Player 11. The screen shown below is displayed on the recorder. Progress Bar Connect PC Copying 00001 Folders 000003 Files ( 000 error ) ( 000 error ) Exit •To cancel the synchronization process on the recorder while it is underway, press ENTER on the recorder’s remote control. The Connect PC screen is closed. •If synchronization fails, make sure that the Pioneer. HDD/DVD-Recorder device is selected at the synchronization screen of Windows Media Player 11, and try again. 6. When you have finished copying files, close Windows Media Player 11 on the PC. •Press ENTER on the recorder’s remote control, close the import screen on this device. 126 En Artist 2 • With Windows Media Player 11, the above music folder is not displayed. • For the maximum number of tracks that can be copied, see Copying music to the HDD on page 111. • Note that when there are many tracks contained in one album, it may take time to display and transfer these tracks. • Artists, albums and tracks with no set name that are transferred from CD/DVD/ USB are displayed as ‘Unknown Artist’, ‘Unknown Album’ and ‘Unknown File’ in Windows Media Player 11. • Artists, albums and track names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may display differently in Windows Media Player 11 and the Jukebox. • Files other than WMA/MP3 files cannot be copied with Windows Media Player 11. • Files imported to this recorder via Connect PC cannot be exported from this recorder. • Note that no recording functions, including timer recordings, will be carried out when you are using the Connect PC function. 15 Connect_PC.fm 127 ページ 2008年3月12日 水曜日 午前10時18分 Copying files from a PC (Connect PC) Copying JPEG and DivX files From the PC: 1. Open Windows Explorer. 2. Select the folder containing the files to be copied. Always copy entire folders. 3. Right-click the mouse and select ‘Copy’ from the menu. 4. Select the folder into which you want to copy. In Windows Explorer, the recorder’s folder is displayed as shown below. Pioneer HDD/DVD-Recorder Pictures Fixed storage 15 6. When you have finished copying files, close Windows Explorer on the PC. •Press ENTER on the recorder’s remote control, close the import screen on this device. •If no actions are carried out for 20 minutes after copying, the import screen on this device is automatically closed. Note • JPEG files can only be copied with the folder structure shown below. It is not possible to place JPEG files directly into the Picture folder. Also, it is not possible to create more folders under folders you have created. Video The folder into which the files should be copied depends on the type of file. Select the folder according to the type of file. •Pictures – Select this to copy folders containing JPEG files. •Video –Select this to copy folders containing DivX files. For details on folder structure, see Note below. 5. Right-click the mouse and select ‘Paste’ from the menu. For more information refer to the Help menu of Windows Explorer. The screen shown below is displayed on the recorder. Progress Bar Connect PC Copying 00001 Folders 000003 Files ( 000 error ) ( 000 error ) Exit •To cancel the synchronization process on the recorder while it is underway, press ENTER on the recorder’s remote control. The Connect PC screen is closed. Pictures Folder 1 photo1.jpg photo2.jpg Folder 2 photo1.jpg • DivX files can only be copied with the folder structure shown below. It is not possible to place DivX files directly into the Video folder. Also, it is not possible to create more folders under folders you have created. Video Folder 1 movie1.divx movie2.divx Folder 2 movie1.divx • For details on files that can be copied, see Disc/content format playback compatibility on page 7. • For the maximum number of folders/files that can be copied, see the instructions on playing the different types of files (Copying DivX files to the HDD (PC VIDEO) on page 109, Importing files to the HDD (PhotoViewer) on page 120). 127 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 128 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Disc Setup menu 16 Chapter 16 The Disc Setup menu From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure, initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is accessed from the Home Menu. Basic settings Lock Disc DVD (VR) DVD-RAM • Default setting: Off Locking the disc will prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc. Important Input Disc Name • A locked disc can still be initialized (which will completely erase the disc). DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name function to change the default disc name to something more descriptive. This name appears when you load the disc and when you display disc information on-screen. HOME MENU 1 2 Display the Home Menu. ENTER ENTER 3 Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Lock Disc’ then ‘On’ or ‘Off’. HOME MENU 1 Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’. Disc Setup Display the Home Menu. Basic Input Disc Name On Initialize Lock Disc Off Finalize DVD-RW Auto Init. Optimize HDD 2 ENTER Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’. ENTER 3 Select ‘Basic’ > ‘Input Disc Name’ > ‘Next Screen’. Disc Setup Basic Input Disc Name Initialize Lock Disc Finalize DVD-RW Auto Init. Next Screen Optimize HDD Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc to make edits, select Off. DVD-RW Auto Initialize DVD-RW ENTER 4 Input a name for the disc. The disc name can be up to 64 characters long for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD+R/+RW. 128 En • See Title Name on page 93 for more on navigating the input screen. • Default setting: VR Mode Initialization mode is automatically carried out when you insert a blank DVD-RW. You must set the desired initialization mode before inserting a disc. See DVD-RW Auto Initialize on page 74 for detailed instructions. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 129 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Disc Setup menu Initialize settings DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW disc for either VR mode or Video mode recording. The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Disc Setup menu (see page 74). New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize them for VR mode recording.1 DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized as a way of erasing the entire disc. When initializing a DVD-RAM disc, select VR mode. See Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 73 for detailed instructions. Finalize settings 16 Undo Finalize DVD-RW You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you want to record more material or edit material already on the disc. You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization. is displayed, use this command to be able to record on the disc using this recorder. HOME MENU 1 Display the Home Menu. ENTER 2 Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’. ENTER 3 Select ‘Finalize’ > ‘Undo Finalize’ then ‘Start’. Optimize HDD Finalize DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs. This is only necessary if you want the DVD player to display the title menu for the disc. See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 72 for detailed instructions. HDD As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the HDD will need optimizing to ‘clean up’ all the fragmented files. When the HDD needs optimizing the recorder will automatically display a message recommending optimization. Important • Optimizing the HDD can take up to eight hours to complete. During optimization, playback and recording are not possible. • Cancelling optimization mid-way does not undo the optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly optimized. Note 1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also, once recorded in Video mode, the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording. 129 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 130 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Disc Setup menu 16 HOME MENU 1 2 Display the Home Menu. ENTER Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’. ENTER Select ‘Optimize HDD’ then 3 ‘Start’. Disc Setup Optimize HDD Basic Start Initialize Finalize Optimize HDD A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go. If no actions are carried out for more than 20 minutes after the optimization process is completed, the unit turns itself off. Initialize HDD HDD When your HDD/DVD recorder is working without a problem this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for some reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it. HOME MENU 1 2 Display the Home Menu. ENTER Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Disc Setup’. ENTER Select ‘Initialize HDD’ then 3 ‘Start’. Disc Setup Basic Initialize Finalize Initialize HDD Optimize HDD 130 En Initialize HDD Start DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 131 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Video Adjust menu 17 Chapter 17 The Video Adjust menu Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc playback, and for recording. Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality settings for the built-in TV tuner1 and for each external input. There are several preset settings that suit various sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets. • DTV/LDP – suitable for digital broadcasts and Laserdiscs • Memory1 – user preset 1 • Memory2 – user preset 2 • Memory3 – user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset (Tuner, VCR or DTV/LDP). Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). Choosing a preset HOME MENU 1 With the recorder stopped, press to display the Home Menu. 2 ENTER Select ‘Detailed Settings’. Pr 1 2 ENTER 3 ENTER Memory1 Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Video Adjust’. Detailed Settings Select a preset. ENTER Pr 1 3 adjust. Select the setting you want to Tuner Detailed Settings • Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the built-in TV tuner and the external inputs. • Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner. There are six presets available: • Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts • VCR – suitable for video cassettes Memory1 Prog. Motion Pr 1 Motion PureCinma Still Auto Motion Still YNR Off Max CNR Off Max Detail Off 3-D Y/C White AGC Max On You can adjust the following settings: • Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive. Note 1 If Component Video Out (see page 137) is set to Interlace when this device and the HDMI device are not connected, the settings for the digital tuner cannot be changed. 131 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 17 132 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Video Adjust menu • PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually set to Auto; but try switching to Off if the picture appears unnatural. • 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/colour separation. • YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component. • CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour) component. • Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear. • White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level adjustment. • White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white. • Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black. • Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black level (525 Input Line System only). • Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and green. • Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours appear. ENTER 4 Adjust the currently selected setting. HOME MENU 5 Press to exit. You can now use the preset for any other input or the built-in TV tuner. Tip • To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. Setting the picture quality for disc playback This setting determines how the picture will look when playing discs. Choosing a preset HOME MENU 1 With a disc playing (or paused), press to display the Home Menu. 2 ENTER Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Video Adjust’. 3 ENTER Select a preset. TV Detailed Settings There are six presets available: • TV – suitable for LCD and cathode-ray tube TVs • PDP – suitable for Flat Screen TV • Professional – suitable for professional monitors • Memory1 – user preset 1 • Memory2 – user preset 2 • Memory3 – user preset 3 You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset (TV, PDP or Professional). Creating your own set There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings for disc playback. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3). 2 ENTER Select ‘Detailed Settings’. Memory1 132 En Detailed Settings DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 133 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Video Adjust menu 17 • Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black level. The Black Setup setting is only valid for NTSC output signals. Black Setup is ineffective for HDMI output. • Gamma Correction – Adjusts the brightness of darker images. Gamma Correction is ineffective for HDMI output. • Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and green. Hue is ineffective for HDMI output. • Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours appear. Chroma Level is ineffective for HDMI output. ENTER 3 Select the picture quality setting you want to adjust. Memory1 Prog. Motion Motion PureCinma Still Auto1 YNR Off Max BNR Off Max MNR Off Max Sharpness Soft Fine Detail Soft Fine You can adjust the following settings: • Prog. Motion – Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive. (Prog. Motion is ineffective when PureCinema is On.) • PureCinema – This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually set to Auto 1 but try switching to Auto 2, On or Off if the picture appears unnatural. • YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component. • BNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of flat colour, caused by MPEG compression). • MNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the mosquito noise (artefacts visible around the edges of an image, caused by MPEG compression). • Sharpness – Adjusts the sharpness of the high-frequency (detailed) elements in the picture. Sharpness is ineffective for HDMI output. • Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear. • White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white. White Level is ineffective for HDMI output. • Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black. Black Level is ineffective for HDMI output. ENTER 4 Adjust the currently selected setting. HOME MENU 5 Press to exit. Tip • To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust. 133 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 18 134 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu Chapter 18 The Initial Setup menu Using the Initial Setup menu The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on. Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu. Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity. • Press HOME MENU and select ‘Setup’ > ‘Initial Setup’. In the table below, the default option is marked with a •. Setting Options Explanation Auto Set the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set automatically. Manual • If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you can set the time and date manually. Basic Clock Setting • If any digital TV channels are set then the clock will automatically be set. • The clock must be set in order to use timer recording. Input Line System 525 System Use for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external input. 625 System • Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording. • This setting is applicable only when recording from an external input. • See also About the input line system on page 148 for more information on this setting. Power Save HELP Setting EPG Type Select 134 En Mode 1 Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the antenna output when the recorder is in standby. Mode 2 No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is in standby. Off • When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving at the SCART and antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs. On • Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. Off Switches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press HELP on the remote to manually display the Help screen.) GUIDE Plus+ Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG. Digital EPG Use the EPG based on information provided by D.TV broadcasts. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 135 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation Setup Navigator Start Select to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switching on and setting up on page 32. Next Screen Scans for digital channels and replaces all the channel presets with the results. Before the scan starts you will need to select your country. After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels were found, and if so, how many. (You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or RETURN/EXIT. In this case, no channels are set.) 18 Digital Tuner Replace Channels If you execute a Replace Channels command, any timer recordings set for D.TV channels will be erased. Add New Channels Next Screen Automatically scans for new digital channels. After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels were found, and if so, how many. (You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or RETURN/EXIT. In this case, no new channels are set.) Channel Sort Next Screen Use this screen to sort channel presets into your prefered order. Use the /// buttons to highlight the channel you want to move, press ENTER. Use the cursor buttons again to highlight the position you want to move the channel preset to, then press ENTER again. (If there are more channel presets than will fit on one screen, you can select the next/previous page by highlighting the small triangular marks and pressing ENTER.) Channel Options Next Screen From this screen you can skip or lock channels. Locked channels will require the correct password to be entered before the channel can be watched. Use the /// buttons to highlight a preference box and press ENTER to toggle the preference. To enter this screen, input the parental lock password when prompted (if one has not yet been set then the password you enter becomes the parental lock password). Auto Skip Off • No channels are automatically skipped. Radio Radio channels are skipped when selecting channels. Data Data channels are skipped when selecting channels. Radio & Data Radio and data channels are skipped when selecting channels. 135 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 18 136 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation Signal Check Next Screen Use this screen to check the signal level and quality of digital channels. Use the / buttons to change the RF channel; select Add New Channels then press ENTER to scan for new channels; press HOME MENU to exit. Aerial Power On Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) when this recorder is on or in standby. Auto Power is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) only when this recorder is on. Off • This recorder does not supply power to the connected aerial (antenna). If the setting keeps reverting to Off when you try to set to On or Auto, the aerial may not be connected properly, or it may be shorted. In either case, check the connection and try making the setting again. D.TV Language Next Screen From this screen you can set your Primary and Secondary Audio preference for multilingual digital broadcasts, your Primary and Secondary Subtitle preference for programmes that are broadcast with subtitles, and your Teletext language preference. Use the / buttons to highlight a field then use the / buttons to change it. Auto Scan Select your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into channels in your area. After auto scan has finished, the channel mapping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to which programme numbers. You can skip unwanted channels using the Manual CH Setting option (see page 137). Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping screen. Download from TV If your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that your TV is tuned to via the SCART input. Select your country and then wait for the download to complete. After the download is complete, the channel mapping screen appears, as above. See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more information. Analog Tuner Auto Channel Setting 136 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 137 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation Manual CH Setting Next Screen Proceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made by auto tuning. Select your country, then proceed to the manual channel setting screen: • Change channel presets using the CHANNEL +/– buttons. • To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that channel), change the Skip setting to On. • Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel system of your country or region. • Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want to assign to the current channel preset. • To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off then adjust the Level setting. • Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region. • The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters for the current channel preset. • If the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder connected to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER), set the Decoder setting to On. Channel Swapping Next Screen Proceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different presets so that you can group together presets that naturally go together. Select two presets to swap then press ENTER. Next Screen Proceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external input and the built-in TV tuner. Use the CHANNEL +/– or INPUT SELECT buttons to change the preset or external input. On the default Auto setting the recorder can generally correctly detect whether the input signal is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in some cases you may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed incorrectly. 18 Video In/Out Input Colour System • Input Colour System cannot be set when the recorder is in D.TV mode. • See also About the input colour system on page 148 for more information on this setting. Component Video Out Interlace • Select if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressivescan video. Progressive Select if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the operating instructions that came with your monitor/TV if you’re not sure. • For Component Video Out to be effective, the AV1 Out setting (see page 138) must be set to something other than RGB. • If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive, you will not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen Resolution on page 144 to the default setting). • When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT. 137 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 18 138 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation AV1 Out Video • Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to standard composite video (compatible with all TVs). S-Video Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to S-Video. Recommended if you are using a long SCART cable. RGB Sets the AV1 (RGB)-TV SCART output to RGB. Good quality but check your TV for compatibility. Note that on this setting signals from the built-in tuner and from external inputs is not output when the recorder is in TV mode. • If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case either switch off and reconnect using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 167). • The Component Video Out setting (see page 137) has no effect when AV1 Out is set to RGB. • When the HDMI signal is output, the AV1 Out outputs the composite video signal even when it is set to RGB. AV2/L1 In NTSC on PAL TV Video • Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to standard composite video. S-Video Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to S-Video. RGB Sets the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to RGB. Decoder Use this setting if you connected a decoder to the AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector. For scrambled channels, make sure that the channel Decoder setting is set to On. (See Manual CH Setting on page 137.) On • NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs. Off Use if your TV is already NTSC-compatible. Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 148 for related information. Audio In NICAM • Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. Regular Audio Record the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (You can still switch the audio to record using the AUDIO button before recording.) Analog Tuner Level Normal • Standard setting. External Audio Stereo • Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard stereo. Bilingual Select if each channel carries a separate soundtrack. NICAM Select Compression Use if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing distortion. When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here. 138 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 139 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation Bilingual Recording A/L • Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW or in LPCM mode, from an external source. B/R As above, but for right (B) channel recording. 18 When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback. DV Input Stereo 1 • Select to use the ‘live’ audio track (recorded during the video shoot) from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks. Stereo 2 Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks. Mix Select one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio tracks. Dolby Digital • Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played. Audio Out Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital Convert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if PCM your connected equipment doesn’t have a Dolby Digital decoder. DTS Out 96 kHz PCM Out MPEG Out Audio DRC On • Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played. Off Switch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use when your connected equipment doesn’t have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the analog audio outputs. 96 kHz 48 kHz • Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t support 96 kHz sampling rate. 96 kHz Output 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played. MPEG Output an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is being played. MPEG PCM • Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected equipment doesn’t have an MPEG audio decoder. On Switches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control). Use when listening to Dolby Digital material at low volume. Off • Switches off Audio DRC. Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital. 139 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 18 140 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation Language OSD Language Audio Language English • Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed for the on-screen displays. English • Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language for DVD-Video playback. Other Select to set the default audio language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 147. Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference. Subtitle Language English • Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English. available languages Choose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback. Other Select to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 147. Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference. Auto Language On • On this setting: • DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language will play using that language, without subtitles. • Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but that have a subtitle track in your default language will play the original audio track with subtitles. Off Select to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle language preferences. For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language. 140 En 18 Initial_Settings.fm 141 ページ 2008年3月12日 水曜日 午前10時20分 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation DVD Menu Language w/Subtitle Language • Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the subtitle language. English Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to English. available languages Choose from the displayed languages to set the default language for DVD-Video menus. Other Select to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 147. 18 Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language. Subtitle Display On • Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language and Auto Language preferences. Off Select to switch off subtitle display. Assist Subtitle Select to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available. Some discs may override these settings. Recording Manual Recording On All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to MN32, (go to setup) LPCM and XP+ modes can be set. Off • Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP and SEP) can be set. See also Manual recording modes on page 152 for detailed information on manual recording levels. Optimized Rec On The recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to fit on to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality setting. If the recording will not fit even at MN1 (MN4 for DVD+R/+RW), then the recording will be made to the HDD in the original quality selected. Off • When a timer recording is set that won’t fit on to the selected media, the recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible. Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be used together with VPS/PDC. Subtitle Recording On The selected subtitle language is recorded with the D.TV timer recording. Off • No subtitles are recorded with D.TV timer recordings. 141 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 18 142 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation Set Thumbnail 0 seconds • Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first frame of the title. 30 seconds Sets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title. 3 minutes Sets the default thumbnail picture to three minutes into the title. On • When recording to the HDD or a VR mode DVD, chapter markers are inserted at the black screen between commercials and main programming. When recording from a DV camcorder, chapter markers are inserted at the point where the date/time switches on the recorded source. Off Automatic chapter marking is switched off. No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off. Auto Chapter (HDD/VR) Auto Chapter (Video) 10 minutes • When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes. 15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes. This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/-RW discs. Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) No Separation Automatic chapter marking is switched off. 10 minutes • When recording in DVD+R/+RW, chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes. 15 minutes Chapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes. This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to DVD+R/+RW discs. HDD Recording Format Video Mode Off Recordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if you don’t need to transfer the recording later to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW. Video Mode On • Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode recordings. This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW as high-speed copy can be used. • When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 139. • When the recording mode is set to XP+, you cannot change HDD Recording Format. 142 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 143 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation 4:3 (Letter Box) Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format presentation for widescreen material. 18 Playback TV Screen Size 4:3 Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and (Pan & Scan) scan presentation for widescreen material. 16:9 • Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine how 4:3 material will look. Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override this setting. Still Picture Seamless Playback Field Produces a stable, generally shake-free image. Frame Produces sharp image, but may be prone to shake. Auto • Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image. On Playback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit points. Off • You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during playback of a VR mode Play List. This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback. Angle Indicator On • A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD-Video disc. Off Nothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing. Parental Lock Set Password/ Next Screen Change Password If no password has yet been set, enter a four digit number to become your password. If you want to change the password, first enter your old password, then enter a new one. DVD Playback Change Level From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a parental lock level. Country/ Area Code From the following screen, first enter your password and then set a country/area code. See Country/Area code list on page 164. Only certain discs have parental lock and country/area code features. Check the disc packaging to see what features the disc has. If you forget your password you can reset it by resetting the recorder to its factory settings. See Resetting the recorder on page 167. D.TV Age Limit Next Screen Use this screen to enter an age limit for D.TV programmes. Programmes that are broadcast with age suitability guidelines that fall above the age set here will require the correct password to be entered before the channel can be viewed. You must also enter your password in order to change the age limit setting. This setting is only applicable when the country is set to France, Denmark, Finland or Sweden. 143 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 18 144 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected) Screen Resolution 1920 x 1080p Constant 1920 x 1080p output. 1920 x 1080i Constant 1920 x 1080i output. 1280 x 720p Constant 1280 x 720p output. 720 x 576p (720 x 480p) Constant 720 x 576p output (when setting the Input Line System to 525 System, video is output in 720 x 480p). 720 x 576i (720 x 480i) Constant 720 x 576i output (when setting the Input Line System to 525 System, video is output in 720 x 480i). • Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available. • If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 137 to the default setting). • If you have the Colour set to YCbCr 4:2:2, you cannot select 720 x 576i (720 x 480i). 4:3 Video Output Full Colour Select if your HDMI TV allows you to change the aspect ratio. Normal Select if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change the aspect ratio. 4:3 video will be shown with bars on each side. RGB (0–255) Use if colours are weak and black appears to ‘float’ on the RGB (16–235) setting. RGB (16–235) Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the black too deep on the RGB (0–255) setting. YCbCr 4:2:2 The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4:2:2 component signal. This is the standard setting for HDMI-compatible devices. YCbCr 4:4:4 The video signal is output as a YCbCr 4:4:4 component signal. • Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available. • When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4:4 options are not available. • You cannot choose YCbCr 4:2:2 when the Screen Resolution is set to 720 x 576i (720 x 480i). Audio Output Auto • Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a bitstream signal. However, depending on the Audio Out setting, number of audio channels, and the HDMI-connected device, Linear PCM audio may be output. PCM All audio signals are converted to Linear PCM (except DTS). Bitstream Priority Select if the connected device is compatible with bitstream audio. This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected. 144 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 145 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation HDMI Control On • Enables the HDMI Control function. Select this option when connected to an HDMI Control-compatible Pioneer Flat Screen TV, AV system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.) or HD AV converter. Off Disables the HDMI Control function. Select this option when not connected to an HDMI Control-compatible component, or when connected to a component manufactured by a company other than Pioneer. 18 • The KURO LINK function name used on the web and in catalogues is referred to as HDMI Control in the operating instructions and on the product. • For more information about HDMI Control, see HDMI Control on page 22. • This setting is available even if you are not connected to an HDMI device. • For more information, see Troubleshooting on page 158. Options On Screen Display Front Panel Display On • The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play, etc.) on-screen. Off Switches off the on-screen operation displays. On • The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby. Off The front panel display is switched off in standby. Remote Control Mode Recorder 1–3 If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, (default: set them to different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to Recorder 1) change the remote controller ID, press and hold RETURN/ EXIT then press 1, 2 or 3 to set. The remote will only control a recorder with the same ID. AV. Link This Recorder Only • Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby are not passed through to the AV output. Pass Through Signals received when in standby are passed though to the output for connected devices. (Note that during EPG data download, the EPG data is not passed through.) When set to Pass Through, make sure to set Power Save (page 134) to Off. DivX VOD Registration Code Use to display the recorder’s DivX registration code. See DivX video compatibility on page 10 and DivX® VOD content on page 10. Set Preview (HDD only) Quick Preview • When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video plays short excerpts from throughout the selected title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally from the beginning.) Normal The thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title. Next Screen This option displays a menu of CI card functions. Consult your service provider for more information on the functions available. CI Information 145 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 18 146 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu Setting Options Explanation Restart USB Device If the connected USB device does not respond to the recorder, try using this option to restart it. If the device still does not work properly try switching it off then back on, and/ or disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable. Confirm Printer Use this option to confirm the maker and model of the printer connected to the recorder (does not work with all printers). TV’s Tuner Allows you to use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Linkcompatible TV connected by SCART cable. Recorder’s Tuner • Allows you to use Pause Live TV with this recorder’s internal TV tuner. Options 2 USB Pause Live TV See also Pause Live TV on page 67 for more information on this setting. HDD Sleep Mode Proceed Puts the HDD to sleep. Using this feature when playing DVDs or CDs allows you to reduce noise produced by the unit, resulting in improved sound quality. When you wake the HDD back up it will take a few seconds to load. The HDD can be taken out of Sleep Mode by any number of actions, including: • Turning the power off and on again. • Pressing the HDD button and choosing the HDD. • When a timer recording begins. • When you try and make any changes to system settings. Gracenote Database Database Update For details, see Updating the recorder’s Gracenote database below. Version Information Shows the current version of the Gracenote database installed in this unit. Software Update Next Screen The Software Update function can check for and download updated system software for the digital tuner. See Using Software Update (Digital tuner) on page 147. Demo Mode On If no operation is performed for several minutes, the unit’s demo file (a video file recorded on the unit’s HDD upon purchase) will be played automatically and repeatedly. Off • The unit’s demo file is not played automatically. • The demo file can be deleted with the PC VIDEO function. When deleted, the demo mode will no longer function. • If the Setup Navigator has never been performed, the demo file will be played automatically even if the Demo Mode is set to Off. 146 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 147 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu Selecting other languages for language options ENTER 1 Select ‘Other’ from the language list. This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language. 2 ENTER Select the language you want. DVD Menu Language OSD Digital Tuner Audio Language Language Subtitle Language Number Auto Language Video In/Out Audio In Audio Out If for some reason the new software could not be downloaded successfully, a dialog box informs you of the error. Press HOME MENU to exit or RETURN/EXIT to return to the previous screen. Note that channel information may be erased when software update is used, and that timer recording will not work during the update. To cancel manual update before it has completed, press HOME MENU. Auto Update Initial Setup Basic Analog Tuner 18 English 0 5 1 4 DVD Menu Language Subtitle Display Language Language Recording • Select by language name: Use the / buttons to change the language. • Select by code number: Press then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit language code. See Language code list on page 164 for a list of available languages and corresponding codes. Using Software Update (Digital tuner) The Software Update function can keep the built-in digital tuner up to date with the latest system software. You can either check for updates manually, or have the recorder do it automatically at regular intervals. Access the Software Update screen from the Options menu. There are three options available: Manual Update, Auto Update and Technical Information. Manual Update Select Manual Update to check for updated software immediately. If new software is found then it is automatically downloaded and installed. The new software will take effect the next time the recorder is powered on. By default, the Auto Update option is On, which means that periodically the recorder will check for and update the digital tuner software if it’s available. We recommend that you leave this option On. If new software is found and successfully downloaded, the recorder automatically scans for new digital channels, informing you if any are found (this is the equivalent of using the Add New Channel option, found in the Digital Tuner section of the Initial Setup menu). Technical Information This displays the current hardware and software version numbers of the digital tuner. Updating the recorder’s Gracenote database 1 Updates the Gracenote database installed in this unit. Load the Update Disc created with the latest data downloaded from the Pioneer website. For details, visit the Pioneer website. (http://www.pioneer.eu) DISPLAY 2 Check the remaining space on the HDD. When the remaining space drops to under 1 hour in the SP recording mode, delete titles stored on the HDD. HOME MENU 3 Display the Home Menu. 147 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 18 148 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 The Initial Setup menu About NTSC on PAL TV ENTER 4 Select ‘Setup’ > ‘Initial Setup’ > ‘Option2’ > ‘Gracenote Database’ > ‘Database Update’. 5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm or ‘No’ to cancel. Input Line System Output NTSC on PAL when TV stopped Additional information about the TV system settings 625 System Off PAL On PAL About the input line system 525 System ENTER This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input Colour System settings determine how the recorder treats incoming video signals from an external input. Please note the following points when changing the input line system: • If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the front panel (Stop) button then pressing INPUT SELECT (also front panel) while the recorder is stopped. • When you switch the Input Line System setting the Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the (Stop) button and INPUT SELECT buttons as described above, there is no confirmation, so please use with care. • You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems on the same disc. • When you change this setting, the Input Colour System setting also changes (see below). 148 En Depending on the Input Line System setting and the NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table below. Off NTSC On PAL–60 About the input colour system The available options of the Input Colour System setting depend on the Input Line System setting. The table below shows the different options available. Input Line System Built-in External analog tuner input 625 System Auto 525 System Auto PAL PAL SECAM SECAM n/a Auto 3.58 NTSC PAL–60 Additional information about component video output If you switch the Component Video Out setting to Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible with progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and hold the (Stop) button on the front panel, then press OPEN/CLOSE. This will set the recorder’s video output back to Interlace. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 149 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information 19 Chapter 19 Additional information Setting up the remote to control your TV You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table below. 1 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the maker code for your TV. See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is more than one code given for your make, input the first one in the list. • If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the table below, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV. 2 Press to check that the remote works with your TV. If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/off. If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 1 with a new code. Using the TV remote control buttons The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV. Button What it does Press to switch the TV on/off (standby) INPUT SELECT Press to change the TV’s video input VOL +/– Use to adjust the TV volume CH +/– Use to change TV channels Maker Code(s) ACURA 44 ADMIRAL 31 AIWA 60 AKAI 32, 35, 42 AKURA 41 ALBA 07, 39, 41, 44 AMSTRAD 42, 44, 47 ANITECH 44 ASA 45 ASUKA 41 AUDIOGONIC 07, 36 BASIC LINE 41, 44 BAUR 31, 07, 42 BEKO 38 BEON 07 BLAUPUNKT 31 BLUE SKY 41 BLUE STAR 18 BPL 18 BRANDT 36 BTC 41 BUSH 07, 41, 42, 44, 47, 56 CASCADE 44 CATHAY 07 CENTURION 07 CGB 42 CIMLINE 44 CLARIVOX 07 CLATRONIC 38 CONDOR 38 CONTEC 44 CROSLEY 32 CROWN 38, 44 CRYSTAL 42 CYBERTRON 41 DAEWOO 07, 44, 56 DAINICHI 41 DANSAI 07 DAYTON 44 DECCA 07, 48 DIXI 07, 44 DUMONT 53 ELIN 07 ELITE 41 ELTA 44 EMERSON 42 ERRES 07 FERGUSON 07, 36, 51 FINLANDIA 35, 43, 54 FINLUX 32, 07, 45, 48, 53, 54 FIRSTLINE 40, 44 FISHER 32, 35, 38, 45 FORMENTI 32, 07, 42 FRONTECH 31, 42, 46 FRONTECH/PROTECH 32 FUJITSU 48 FUNAI 40, 46, 58 GBC 32, 42 GE 00, 01, 08, 07, 10, 11, 17, 02, 28, 18 GEC 07, 34, 48 GELOSO 32, 44 GENERAL 29 GENEXXA 31, 41 149 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 19 150 En 150 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information Maker Code(s) Maker Code(s) GOLDSTAR 10, 23, 21, 02, 07, 50 GOODMANS 07, 39, 47, 48, 56 GORENJE 38 GPM 41 GRAETZ 31, 42 GRANADA 07, 35, 42, 43, 48 GRADIENTE 30, 57 GRANDIN 18 GRUNDIG 31, 53 HANSEATIC 07, 42 HCM 18, 44 HINARI 07, 41, 44 HISAWA 18 HITACHI 31, 33, 34, 36, 42, 43, 54, 06, 10, 24, 25, 18 HUANYU 56 HYPSON 07, 18, 46 ICE 46, 47 IMPERIAL 38, 42 INDIANA 07 INGELEN 31 INTERFUNK 31, 32, 07, 42 INTERVISION 46, 49 ISUKAI 41 ITC 42 ITT 31, 32, 42 JEC 05 JVC 13, 23 KAISUI 18, 41, 44 KAPSCH 31 KENDO 42 KENNEDY 32, 42 KORPEL 07 KOYODA 44 LEYCO 07, 40, 46, 48 LIESENK&TTER 07 LOEWE 07 LUXOR 32, 42, 43 M-ELECTRONIC 31, 44, 45, 54, 56, 07, 36, 51 MAGNADYNE 32, 49 MAGNAFON 49 MAGNAVOX 07, 10, 03, 12, 29 MANESTH 39, 46 MARANTZ 07 MARK 07 MATSUI 07, 39, 40, 42, 44, 47, 48 MCMICHAEL 34 MEDIATOR 07 MEMOREX 44 METZ 31 MINERVA 31, 53 MITSUBISHI 09, 10, 02, 21, 31 MULTITECH 44, 49 NEC 59 NECKERMANN 31, 07 NEI 07, 42 NIKKAI 05, 07, 41, 46, 48 NOBLIKO 49 NOKIA 32, 42, 52 NORDMENDE 32, 36, 51, 52 OCEANIC 31, 32, 42 ORION 32, 07, 39, 40 OSAKI 41, 46, 48 OSO 41 OSUME 48 OTTO VERSAND 31, 32, 07, 42 PALLADIUM 38 PANAMA 46 PANASONIC 31, 07, 08, 42, 22 PATHO CINEMA 42 PAUSA 44 PHILCO 32, 42 PHILIPS 31, 07, 34, 56, 68 PHOENIX 32 PHONOLA 07 PROFEX 42, 44 PROTECH 07, 42, 44, 46, 49 QUELLE 31, 32, 07, 42, 45, 53 R-LINE 07 RADIOLA 07 RADIOSHACK 10, 23, 21, 02 RBM 53 RCA 01, 10, 15, 16, 17, 18, 61, 62, 09 REDIFFUSION 32, 42 REX 31, 46 ROADSTAR 41, 44, 46 SABA 31, 36, 42, 51 SAISHO 39, 44, 46 SALORA 31, 32, 42, 43 SAMBERS 49 SAMSUNG 07, 38, 44, 46, 69, 70 SANYO 35, 45, 48, 21, 14, 91 SBR 07, 34 SCHAUB LORENZ 42 SCHNEIDER 07, 41, 47 SEG 42, 46 SEI 32, 40, 49 SELECO 31, 42 SHARP 02, 19, 27, 67, 90 SIAREM 32, 49 SIEMENS 31 SINUDYNE 32, 39, 40, 49 SKANTIC 43 SOLAVOX 31 SONOKO 07, 44 SONOLOR 31, 35 SONTEC 07 SONY 04 SOUNDWAVE 07 STANDARD 41, 44 STERN 31 SUSUMU 41 SYSLINE 07 TANDY 31, 41, 48 TASHIKO 34 TATUNG 07, 48 TEC 42 TELEAVIA 36 TELEFUNKEN 36, 37, 52 TELETECH 44 TENSAI 40, 41 THOMSON 36, 51, 52, 63 THORN 31, 07, 42, 45, 48 TOMASHI 18 TOSHIBA 05, 02, 26, 21, 53 TOWADA 42 ULTRAVOX 32, 42, 49 UNIDEN 92 UNIVERSUM 31, 07, 38, 42, 45, 46, 54 VESTEL 07 VICTOR 13 VOXSON 31 WALTHAM 43 WATSON 07 WATT RADIO 32, 42, 49 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 07 YOKO 07, 42, 46 ZENITH 03, 20 PIONEER 00, 31, 32, 07, 36, 42, 51 DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 151 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information 19 Minimum copying times The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video. Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying.1 Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility. Rec mode DVD disc type SEP SLP EP LP SP XP 10 h 8h 6h 4h 2h 1h DVD-R/1x DVD-RW/1x 1x 6 mins. 7.5 mins. 10 mins. 15 mins. 30 mins. 60 mins. DVD-RW/2x DVD-R DL DVD-RAM/2x 2x 3 mins. 4 mins. 5 mins. 7.5 mins. 15 mins. 30 mins. DVD+R/2.4x DVD+RW/2.4x DVD+R DL 2.4x *1 *1 *1 6.3 mins. 12.5 mins. 25 mins. DVD-RAM/3x DVD-RAM/5x 3x 2 mins. 2.5 mins. 3.5 mins. 5 mins. 10 mins. 20 mins. DVD-R/4x DVD-RW/4x DVD+R/4x DVD+RW/4x 4x 1.5 mins.*1 2 mins.*1 2.5 mins.*1 4 mins. 7.5 mins. 15 mins. DVD-R/8x/16x DVD+R/8x/16x DVD-RW/6x DVD+RW/8x 6x 1.25 mins.*1 1.6 mins.*1 2.2 mins.*1 3 mins. 5.5 mins. 11 mins. Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded. *1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/+RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied. Note 1 Depending on the disc, the copy speed may be reduced (for example, although a 6x disc is used, the copy may be made at 2x speed). 151 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 152 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information 19 Manual recording modes The table below shows the approximate recording times for different DVD types in each manual recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents. For recording time on the HDD, see Specifications on page 168. Level MN 4 *4 XP+*5 *1 Single-Layer DVD: DVD-R/-RW DVD+R/+RW DVD-RAM Video mode Off (HDD) VR mode (DVD-R/-RW) DVD-RAM VR mode (DVD-R DL) Dual-Layer DVD: DVD-R DL DVD+R DL Video mode On (HDD) Video mode (DVD-R/-RW) DVD+R/+RW Video mode (DVD-R DL) DVD+R DL 720 mins. 1292 mins. SEP 600 mins. 1077 mins. SLP 480 mins. 420 mins. 754 mins. EP 360 mins. 646 mins. 300 mins. 270 mins. 240 mins. 230 mins. 220 mins. 210 mins. 200 mins. 190 mins. 180 mins. 170 mins. 160 mins. 150 mins. 140 mins. 130 mins. 120 mins. 110 mins. 105 mins. 100 mins. 95 mins. 90 mins. 85 mins. 80 mins. 75 mins. 70 mins. 65 mins. 61 mins. 61 mins. --- mins. 538 mins. 484 mins. 431 mins. 413 mins. 395 mins. 377 mins. 359 mins. 341 mins. 323 mins. 305 mins. 287 mins. 269 mins. 251 mins. 233 mins. 215 mins. 197 mins. 188 mins. 179 mins. 170 mins. 161 mins. 153 mins. 144 mins. 135 mins. 126 mins. 117 mins. 111 mins. 111 mins. --- mins. MN 5 *4 MN 6 *4 MN 7 MN 8 MN 9 MN 10 MN 11 MN 12 MN 13 MN 14 MN 15 MN 16 MN 17 MN 18 MN 19 MN 20 MN 21 MN 22 MN 23 MN 24 MN 25 MN 26 MN 27 MN 28 MN 29 MN 30 MN 31 MN 32 LPCM Resolution*2 803 mins. 1440 mins. MN 1 *3,4 MN 2 *3,4 MN 3 *3,4 Rec. time*1 LP SP XP 861 mins. 352 x 240/ 352 x 288 352 x 240/ 352 x 288 352 x 480/ 352 x 576 352 x 480/ 352 x 576 480 x 480/ 480 x 576 544 x 480/ 544 x 576 720 x 480/ 720 x 576 720 x 480/ 720 x 576 Recording time may be slightly shorter for certain disc types or recording modes. The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System. *3 Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW. *4 Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD+R/+RW. *5 XP+ mode is available for HDD recordings only. If set for a DVD recording, the DVD will be automatically recorded in MN32 mode. *2 152 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 153 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information 19 • Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality. • Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in Linear PCM format. • See also Recording on page 60. Troubleshooting Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. General Problem Remedy The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray • Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7). • Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and labelside up). • Take out the disc and clean it (page 166). • Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder. Can’t eject a disc • Turn off the power to this device and press and hold OPEN/CLOSE on the front of the unit for more than three seconds. Can’t play a disc • Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 7). • Take out the disc and clean it (page 166). • Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and labelside up). • Press DVD to select the DVD. • There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate. • During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System different to the current recorder setting. • DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copyonce protected recordings will not play in this recorder. Can’t record a disc • Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 7). • Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been initialized (page 73). This can take up to an hour. Remote control does not work • If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 14). • Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 145). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.) • Use the remote within its operating range (page 6). • Replace the batteries (page 6). All settings are reset • If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the settings will be lost. • Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord. 153 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 19 154 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information Problem Remedy No picture • Check that everything is connected properly (page 14). • Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct input. • The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible TV. Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel (Stop) button then pressing OPEN/CLOSE. • When the HDMI signal is output, no video is output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT. • If you are using an indoor antenna that requires power, make sure that Aerial Power in the Initial Setup menu is set to On or Auto (page 136). • If the aerial/antenna is not connected properly, or if it is shorted, the Aerial Power setting will revert to Off automatically. Check the aerial connection and try making the setting again. No sound or sound is distorted • Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up. • There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play. Press PLAY to resume regular playback. • DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a suitable decoder, also make sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Out setting is On. • Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case, switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog. • Check the audio cable connections (page 14). • If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs. The picture is distorted • Change the Input Line System setting (page 148). (You can also change it by pressing the (Stop) button and INPUT SELECT on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.) 154 En During playback the picture is dark or distorted • When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV. The picture from the external input is distorted • If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV. Screen is stretched vertically or horizontally • Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 143) is correct for the kind of TV you have (see also page 165). • If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings. • This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video. Cannot switch a bilingual programme • During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels. The main and sub channels are both output. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 155 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information Problem Remedy Audio/subtitle language cannot be changed • Note that audio and subtitle languages cannot be changed during the recording of a digital broadcast. • You can only use the audio track and subtitles for the language that were selected at the time of recording a digital broadcast. The audio track and subtitles cannot be changed to other languages. Recorded contents are not clear or artefacts appear in areas of flat colour (due to MPEG compression; also known as block noise) • Change the recording mode to XP/SP. Can’t play a disc recorded using this recorder on another player • If the disc was recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, make sure that it’s finalized (page 72). • Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R and finalized. • If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW compatible in order to play it (page 7). • Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on nonCPRM compatible players (page 62). • DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material may not play on other players. Finalize the disc and try again. • DVD-RAM discs can only be played on DVD-RAM compatible players. A DVD+R/+RW recorded using this unit cannot be subjected to time search in other equipment • Time search may be unavailable with certain equipment. Can’t record or does • Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD. not record successfully • For a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R, check that the disc isn’t already finalized. • Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc: – HDD: 999 titles – VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc – Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title – DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254 chapters per disc) • Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected. • For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 128). • Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want to record (page 148). • The power may have failed during recording. 19 155 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 19 156 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information Problem Remedy Timer programme doesn’t record successfully • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner. • When recording to a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or DVD+R/+RW, programmes that are copy-once protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material (page 62). • Two timer programmes may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record completely. • The power may have failed during recording. After briefly unplugging or after a power failure the front panel display shows ‘--:--’ • A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder. After unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps all settings for a period of several minutes. Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. Front panel display • The child lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 70). shows ‘LOCKED’ when a button is pressed 156 En Can’t use One Touch Copy (HDD to DVD) • Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a DVD-R/-RW (Video mode) or a DVD+R, the disc isn’t finalized. • Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc. • If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of remaining recordable titles may not decrease. • Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that there isn’t a disc menu on the disc you’re trying to use. • If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One Touch Copy will not work. • If the currently playing HDD content was recorded in XP+ mode, the One Touch Copy feature can’t be used. • One Touch Copy can’t be used for titles over eight hours long when copying to DVD+R/+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL). • One Touch Copy can’t be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles when copying to DVD+R/+RW. • One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD. Can’t use One Touch Copy (DVD to HDD) • Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 999 titles on the HDD. • One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD. File names are not displayed properly • Files names that do not conform to the ISO8859-1 standard may not display correctly on this unit. Title searching in the Gracenote database is not possible • Title searching is not possible when the HDD Sleep Mode is set (page 146). DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 157 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information Problem Remedy The device connected to the USB port is not recognized • Check that the device is compatible with this recorder (page 24). • Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length. • Check that the USB cable is inserted fully. • Check that the USB device is powered on. • Try switching this recorder into standby mode and then back on. • Try using the Restart USB Device option from the Initial Setup menu (page 146). • If several USB devices (camera, USB memory, card reader, etc.) are connected at the same time, it’s possible that only the first device connected to this recorder will be recognized. 19 The power • Set the Demo Mode to Off after performing the Setup Navigator automatically turns on (page 146). A video file recorded on the unit’s HDD is played automatically • Set the Demo Mode to Off after performing the Setup Navigator (page 146). 157 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 19 158 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information HDMI Problem Remedy The connected HDMI or DVI device does not display any picture (and the front panel HDMI indicator does not light) • Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the power of both components is on). • Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on. • Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next, switch on the HDMI/DVI device and leave it for around 30 seconds, then switch on this recorder. • When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the following: – The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit. – The cable you’re using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a nonstandard cable may result in no picture being output. – Don’t use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single cable to connect devices together. • When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the following: – The connected device’s video input is set correctly for this unit. – The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible. – The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i/p) video input. • If the recorder’s internal HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no HDMI output. • Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder. The power • This unit’s power may be turned on each time you turn on the power automatically turns on for a connected Flat Screen TV. If you do not want this unit to be turned on in this way, set this unit’s HDMI Control to Off (page 145). The power • This unit’s power may be turned off when you control this unit from a automatically turns off connected Flat Screen TV. If you do not want this unit to be turned off in this way, set this unit’s HDMI Control to Off (page 145). 158 En Your Flat Screen TV and AV system automatically change inputs • The connected Flat Screen TV, AV system (amplifier or AV receiver etc.), or HD AV Converter automatically may change inputs in response to this unit starting playback or having the GUI screen (ex. Disc Navigator) displayed. If you do not want your Flat Screen TV and AV system to change inputs in this way, set this unit’s HDMI Control to Off (page 145). Can’t record video • When using HDMI Control to record, you must make sure that the channel information for the Flat Screen TV matches that of this unit. If the channel information does not match you cannot make recordings. Use the Auto Channel Setting function to set this unit’s channel information (page 136). DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 159 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information Problem Remedy No video from the HDMI output • If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE while holding down the (Stop) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 137 to the default setting). 19 There’s no sound from • There is no sound when using a DVI terminal. the connected HDMI or • Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with DVI device the manual that came with the connected device). HDMI Control does not • Verify that the HDMI cable is firmly connected (page 21). respond • Check whether HDMI Control is set to On for this unit and the device connected to this unit. For more information, refer to the operating instructions of your Flat Screen TV, AV system or HD AV converter. • Depending on the type of Flat Screen TV, some HDMI input terminals do not support the HDMI Control function. For details, see the operating instructions supplied with your Flat Screen TV. • HDMI Control may not operate properly if you do not use a High Speed HDMI cable. • This function may not work properly if you have multiple recorders connected to a single Flat Screen TV, AV system or HD AV converter. For more information refer to the operating instructions of your Flat Screen TV, AV system or HD AV converter. • Controls may not function properly in certain situations, such as immediately after you have connect an HDMI cable, turn this unit’s power off or remove the power cable for this unit or the connected component. If you experience any problems, set HDMI Control to On for all connected units, and then display the pictures stored on this unit on your Flat Screen TV to improve the situations. • Check whether the connected component supports HDMI Control or not. • Certain functions are not supported on with Flat Screen TVs, AV system or HD AV converter. • We cannot guarantee this unit will work with HDMI Controlcompatible components other than those made by Pioneer. When using HDMI Control-compatible components manufactured by companies other than Pioneer, set the HDMI Control to Off (page 145). If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. 159 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 19 160 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information If the picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working • Press (Stop) then try restarting playback. • Press the front panel STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold STANDBY/ON for five seconds until the power switches off. STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE HDD/DVD HDD STANDBY/ON DV IN USB DVD COMMON INTERFACE STOP REC CH INPUT SELECT On-screen displays The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning. 160 En Message Explanation/Action • Initializing disc. Please wait a moment. When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder automatically initializes it. • Incompatible region number. The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder and so will not play. • Cannot record any more titles. • No more space for file management data. The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/chapters or combine chapters. • This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization. The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the finalization in order to recording/editing. • Cannot play this disc. • This disc cannot be recorded. • Cannot read the CPRM information. • Could not record the information to the disc. • Cannot edit. • Could not initialize disc. • Could not complete finalization successfully. • Could not undo finalization successfully. • Could not successfully unlock the disc. The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc, please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs. • Incompatible or unreadable disc. The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 161 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information 19 Message Explanation/Action • Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM compatible. • Cannot record this content using Video mode recording. • This video cannot be recorded to DVD+R/+RW. The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording. • This content is copy protected. The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded. • Incorrect CPRM information. The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder may be damaged — please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs. • Repairing disc. • Repairing the HDD. During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the power is restored. • Could not repair the disc. The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The contents of the recording will be lost. • Overheating has stopped operation. Press DISPLAY to clear message. The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating limit. If this message reappears, please ask your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs. • HDD optimization is recommended. This can be done using Disc Setup. The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to maintain playback and recording performance. • Please perform HDD optimization. This can be done using Disc Setup. The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to maintain performance. • The HDD has not been sufficiently optimized. Please optimize again. If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for optimization to complete properly. Please erase some titles from the HDD and optimize again. • An error occurred. Please consult the service center. Note that contents on the HDD may be erased when servicing this unit. This message is displayed when information from the HDD cannot be read. The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs. 161 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 19 162 En 162 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information Message Explanation/Action • The Hard Disk Drive info is incorrect. Use the Disc Setup menu to reinitialize. As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 130) may result in your being able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will erase all recorded contents, including protected files. • This signal’s TV system is different from the recorder’s setting. The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different from the TV system settings of this recorder. • Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. Press DISPLAY to clear message. The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder. • Playback has stopped because the TV system is different than the recording. During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to stop automatically. • You are not allowed to watch this Conditional Access Programme. A CA module or smart card (obtained from your service provider) is required to watch the selected programme. Insert the supplied module or card into the Common Interface card slot on the front panel of the recorder (page 27). • There is no DV input or the input signal is unrecordable. No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder. • No DV camcorder connected. The camcorder is not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched off. • You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at a time. This recorder’s DV jack supports connection to just one camcorder. • Cannot operate the DV camcorder. This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder. Try switching off the camcorder then turn it back on again. • Could not operate the DV camcorder. This recorder was not able to operate the DV camcorder. • The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please select playback mode on the DV camcorder. The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to playback mode. • The printer is not ready or is not connected. Please check the printer. This message is displayed when communication could not be established with the printer. See the Troubleshooting section if you do not know the cause. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 163 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information 19 Message Explanation/Action • Printing has been cancelled because ... This message is displayed when there is a printer error during printing. After checking the printer for the cause of the error, either reconnect the printer and start the printing job again, or select “Yes” to resume printing (select “No” to cancel the print job). See also the operating instructions that came with your printer for possible causes of print errors. Front panel displays The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning. Message Explanation/Action • E01 The HDD may be damaged or broken. Please ask your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repairs. • E02 As the HDD info cannot be properly read, no new recordings can be made. Reinitializing the HDD (page 130) may result in your being able to make recording again. Note that reinitializing the HDD will erase all recorded contents, including protected files. 163 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 19 164 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Chinese (zh), 2608 Dutch (nl), 1412 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Swedish (sv), 1922 Russian (ru), 1821 Greek (el), 0512 Polish (pl), 1612 Czech (cs), 0319 Norwegian (no), 1415 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Korean (ko), 1115 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laotian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Country/Area code list Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk 164 En Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Republic of Korea, 1118, kr Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821, ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Sweden, 1905, se Switzerland, 0308, ch Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702, gb USA, 2119, us DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 165 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information 19 Screen sizes and disc formats When viewing on a standard TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 4:3 (Letter Box) The programme is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the programme are cropped so that the picture fills the whole screen. 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan) The programme is presented correctly on either setting. 4:3 When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor Screen format of disc Setting Appearance 16:9 16:9 The programme is presented in widescreen. 4:3 16:9 Your TV will determine how the picture is presented — check the manual that came with the TV for details. 165 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 19 166 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information Handling discs Damaged discs When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge. Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don’t risk using it; you could end up damaging the recorder. Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable. This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a circular motion. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records. Storing discs Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records, you should still take care to handle and store discs correctly. When you’re not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). Don’t glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs. Do not load more than one disc into the 166 recorder. En Cleaning the pickup lens The HDD/DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer-authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are commercially available, we do not recommend using them since some may damage the lens. Condensation Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on and using. DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 167 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information 19 Hints on installation Moving the recorder We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suitable location for it: If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or recording — discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. Do... Use in a well-ventilated room. Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. Don’t... Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. Place on a window sill or other place where the recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight. Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke. Resetting the recorder If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory settings. 1 Make sure that the recorder is on. 2 Using the front panel controls, press and hold (Stop) and press STANDBY/ ON. The recorder turns off with all settings reset. Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference — especially if the television uses an indoor antenna. Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam. Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth — this may prevent proper cooling of the unit. Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unit’s feet. 167 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 19 168 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information Specifications General Power requirements . . . . . 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 W Power consumption in standby mode. . . . . . . . 0.69 W (Front panel display: off) Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 kg Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . .420 mm (W) x 75 mm (H) x 288 mm (D) Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . +5 °C to +35 °C Operating humidity . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation) TV system . . . NTSC (external input only)/PAL/SECAM Readable discs DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW (CD-DA, WMA, MP3, JPEG, DivX) Recording discs and formats DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode DVD+R/+RW: +VR mode DVD-RAM: VR mode DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode DVD+R DL: +VR mode DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL Fine (XP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m Standard Play (SP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 3 h 35 m Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 7 h 11 m Extended Play (EP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h 46 m Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 21 m (DVD-R DL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 14 h 4 m (DVD+R DL) Super Extended Play (SEP) . . . . . . . Approx. 17 h 57 m (DVD-R DL only) Manual Mode (MN) DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h DVD+R DL . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 4 m Timer Programmes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programmes Clock . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display) Tuner (analog) Receivable channels SECAM B/G PAL B/G VHF (low) VHF (high) Hyper Video recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 MHz Compression format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MPEG Audio recording format Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 kHz Compression format . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM (uncompressed) Recording time HDD (160 GB) XP+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 23 h Fine (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 h Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 h Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 h Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 272 h Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 340 h Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 23 h to 455 h DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-RAM Fine (XP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 h Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 h Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 h Super Long Play (SLP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 8 h Super Extended Play (SEP). . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 10 h (DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only) Manual Mode (MN) DVD-R/-RW/-RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h to 13 h DVD+R/+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h to 8 h 168 En UHF Channel E2 to E4 X to Z 104 MHz to 300 MHz E5 to E12 S1 to S20 M1 to M10 U1 to U10 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 PAL I Frequency Frequency Channel 47 MHz to 89 MHz 44 MHz to 89 MHz A to C X to Z D to J 11, 13 S1 to S20 SECAM L Frequency 104 MHz to 300 MHz 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 SECAM D/K PAL D/K Channel FB, FC1, FC Frequency 49 MHz to 94 MHz Channel R1 to R5 F1 to F6 B to Q 104 MHz to 300 MHz R6 to R12 S1 to S20 VHF (low) 49 MHz to 65 MHz VHF (high) 104 MHz to 300 MHz Hyper UHF 300 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 470 MHz to 862 MHz 21 to 69 302 MHz to 470 MHz S21 to S41 470 MHz to 862 MHz E21 to E69 STEREO B/G - A2 I - NICAM L - NICAM B/G - NICAM D/K - NICAM Tuner (digital) Receiving system . . . . . . . . . . DVB-T (2 K/8 K COFDM) Tuner VHF/UHF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VHF band III (174 MHz to 230 MHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . UHF band IV, V (470 MHz to 862 MHz) Auto Channel Preset . . . . . . . . . . 999 ch, Auto Preset, Auto Label, Auto Sort Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo MPEG layer I/II Audio Decoder . . . . . Sampling frequencies: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz This product’s digital tuner has been confirmed for use in the following countries: Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Spain, Denmark, Finland, Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland, UK, Austria, Czech Republic. 19 Additional_Information.fm 169 ページ 2008年3月6日 木曜日 午後3時24分 Additional information Input/Output Antenna . . . . 75 Ω IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (analog) . . . . .75 Ω IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (digital) Video input . . . . . . . . . . . .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front), Input 3 (rear) Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (Input 1), RCA jacks (Input 2, Input 3) Video output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1), RCA jack (Output) S-Video input . . . . . . . . . .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front), Input 3 (rear) Y (luminance) - Input level. . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (Input 1), 4-pin mini DIN (Input 2, Input 3) S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1, Output Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω) C (colour) - Output level. . . . . . . . . 300 mVp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1), 4-pin mini DIN (Output) Component video output Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω) PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RCA jacks RGB input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV2 (Input 1) Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (Input 1) RGB output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (AV1) Audio input . . . . . . . . . . .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front), Input 3 (rear) L/R During audio input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms (Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector (Input 1), RCA jacks (Input 2, Input 3) Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1, Output L/R During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V rms (Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ) Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector (AV1), RCA jacks (Output) Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack Digital audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Coaxial G-LINK™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack Common Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CA module DV input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pin (front) (i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard) USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A (front), Type B (front) HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19-pin 19 AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment) AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector This connector provides the video and audio signals for connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor. PIN no. AV1 (RGB)-TV / AV2 (INPUT 1/DECODER) 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out 20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND Supplied accessories Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Audio/Video cable (red/white/yellow). . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 G-LINK™ cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Operating Instructions Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement. 169 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 19 170 En 170 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 171 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information 19 171 En 19 Additional_Information.fm 19 172 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後8時10分 Additional information Follow the instructions for ‘Replace Channels’ (page 135). 172 En DVR560HX_WV_EN.book 173 ページ 2008年2月22日 金曜日 午後7時26分 Additional information This product includes FontAvenue ® fonts licenced by NEC Corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation. Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com. CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523. Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote. This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (”Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended EndUser functions of this application or device. You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any 19 payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name. The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service. The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time. GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. The contents of the Gracenote data in both the recorder and the dedicated server are not 100% guaranteed. The supply of the Gracenote data in the dedicated server may be stopped without prior notice for the reason of maintenance, etc. The Gracenote data communication service of the dedicated server may be stopped without the consent of the users in case the required content cannot be collected or for other reason that hinders provision of the service. 173 En 00 Cover_back_560HX_WV.fm 1 ページ 2008年3月6日 木曜日 午前10時54分 HDD/DVD Recorder Operating Instructions DVR-560HX-K DVR-560HX-S HDD/DVD Recorder http://www.pioneer.co.uk http://www.pioneer.eu Published by Pioneer Corporation. Copyright © 2008 Pioneer Corporation. All rights reserved. Operating Instructions PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. Discover the benefits of registering your product online at http://www.pioneer.co.uk (or http://www.pioneer.eu) 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 Printed in UK K002_B_En <VRB1486-A>